Canon ImagePRESS C850 Series_Operation Guide Operation For Image PRESS Series With PRISMAsync
User Manual: Canon Operation Guide for imagePRESS C850 Series with PRISMAsync Production Printing User Manuals
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 446
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Operation guide imagePRESS C850 Series Copyright and Trademarks Copyright CANON INC. 2017 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc. Disclaimers The information in this document is subject to change without notice. CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL. Trademarks "MEAP" is a trademark of CANON Inc., referring to an "application platform" for Canon multifunction and single function printers. This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc. Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Excel and PowerPoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright © Unpublished Work of Novell, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Portions of this software are copyright © 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2002 Aladdin Enterprises. All rights reserved. Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Edition 2017-07 Software version 5.2 US Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593; 6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries. All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter. Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language. Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries. All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter. Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language. Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Océ, Océ PRISMA, Océ PRISMAsync, Océ PRISMAprepare, Océ PRISMAproduction and Océ PRISMAaccess are registered trademarks of Océ. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2007 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to (insert name of your company) to distribute for use only in combination with (insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials). PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of (insert appropriate name of Licensed Materials). © Pantone, Inc., 2017 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Contents Contents Chapter 1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................11 About the imagePRESS C850 Series............................................................................................................ 12 Information in this operation guide.............................................................................................................. 13 Users of the print system...............................................................................................................................14 Notes for the reader....................................................................................................................................... 15 Installation precautions..................................................................................................................................16 Handling precautions..................................................................................................................................... 20 Chapter 2 Explore the printer............................................................................................................23 Main hardware parts...................................................................................................................................... 24 Print module parts..........................................................................................................................................27 Paper Input......................................................................................................................................................29 Paper module .......................................................................................................................................... 29 Bulk paper module...................................................................................................................................30 Inserter...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Automatic document feeder................................................................................................................... 32 Special feeder...........................................................................................................................................33 Finishing and delivery....................................................................................................................................35 Professional stacker / stapler.................................................................................................................. 35 Standard stacker / stapler........................................................................................................................37 Professional puncher............................................................................................................................... 38 Folder........................................................................................................................................................ 39 Copy tray...................................................................................................................................................40 Chapter 3 Getting started..................................................................................................................41 What can this print system do for you?........................................................................................................42 Explore the ease of operation....................................................................................................................... 43 Learn about the media-based workflow................................................................................................ 43 Learn about the color-based workflow.................................................................................................. 44 Learn about the document printing workflow.......................................................................................46 Learn about the transaction printing workflow..................................................................................... 47 Learn about automated workflows.........................................................................................................49 Interact with the imagePRESS C850 Series..................................................................................................50 Learn about interaction screens............................................................................................................. 50 Learn about user authentication.............................................................................................................54 Learn about printer status....................................................................................................................... 56 Start the print system.....................................................................................................................................58 Awake the printer from sleep mode.......................................................................................................58 Turn on the print system......................................................................................................................... 59 Restart the print system.......................................................................................................................... 60 Turn off the print system.........................................................................................................................61 Log in and log out.................................................................................................................................... 62 Adjust the control panel.......................................................................................................................... 64 Choose a workflow profile...................................................................................................................... 68 Select an accounting mode.....................................................................................................................71 Register the color tones for the ACCT function.....................................................................................73 imagePRESS C850 Series 5 Contents Chapter 4 Media handling................................................................................................................. 75 Media for your output.................................................................................................................................... 76 Finishing for your output............................................................................................................................... 78 Manage the media catalog............................................................................................................................ 82 Add media to the media catalog................................................................................................................... 84 Check and prepare media.............................................................................................................................. 86 Check and prepare media before loading..............................................................................................86 Check and prepare envelopes before loading....................................................................................... 88 Check and prepare transparencies before loading............................................................................... 90 Load media..................................................................................................................................................... 91 Load media into the internal paper trays...............................................................................................91 Load media into the paper module........................................................................................................ 93 Load media into the bulk paper module................................................................................................ 97 Load media into the special feeder...................................................................................................... 101 Load long sheets into the special feeder............................................................................................. 103 Load media into the inserter................................................................................................................. 105 Load envelopes into the internal paper trays...................................................................................... 107 Load tab paper into the internal paper trays....................................................................................... 110 Load media for the scheduled jobs...................................................................................................... 112 Chapter 5 Prepare the jobs.............................................................................................................. 113 Prepare print jobs......................................................................................................................................... 114 Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver.................................................................................... 114 Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare.............................................................................................. 116 Drag & drop print files on hotfolders................................................................................................... 118 Print a file from a USB drive................................................................................................................. 119 Work with variable data in document printing mode......................................................................... 120 Prepare copy and scan jobs.........................................................................................................................121 Copy jobs................................................................................................................................................ 121 Scan jobs................................................................................................................................................ 123 Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan......................................................................... 124 Use the glass plate to copy or scan......................................................................................................126 Make a copy............................................................................................................................................127 Make a scan............................................................................................................................................ 128 Use templates for recurring jobs.......................................................................................................... 130 Copy subsets (combined copying)....................................................................................................... 131 Scan subsets (combined scanning)......................................................................................................132 Chapter 6 Plan the workload remotely.......................................................................................... 133 Use Remote Manager to plan the workload ............................................................................................. 134 Set up workload planning............................................................................................................................135 Prepare the jobs remotely........................................................................................................................... 136 Plan and print the jobs remotely.................................................................................................................137 Change job properties remotely................................................................................................................. 138 Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing......................................................................................139 Chapter 7 Plan the jobs....................................................................................................................141 Use the DocBox............................................................................................................................................ 142 DocBox....................................................................................................................................................142 Change a DocBox job............................................................................................................................ 143 Combine DocBox jobs........................................................................................................................... 144 Lock DocBox job settings...................................................................................................................... 145 6 imagePRESS C850 Series Contents Print DocBox jobs...................................................................................................................................146 Manage the jobs in the queue.....................................................................................................................147 Job management in the queues........................................................................................................... 147 View the jobs in the queues.................................................................................................................. 150 Bundle jobs.............................................................................................................................................151 Add extra sheets to a job.......................................................................................................................152 Move a scheduled job to the list of waiting jobs.................................................................................153 Send a job to another printer................................................................................................................154 Remove print jobs..................................................................................................................................155 Convert a job to a variable data job..................................................................................................... 156 Load and assign media................................................................................................................................ 157 Add temporary media to the media catalog........................................................................................157 Assign media to a paper tray................................................................................................................ 158 Chapter 8 Print the jobs................................................................................................................... 159 Change a job................................................................................................................................................. 160 Preview job settings...............................................................................................................................160 Change job settings............................................................................................................................... 161 Use page programming........................................................................................................................ 162 Adjust CMYK curves for a job............................................................................................................... 164 Proofing.........................................................................................................................................................167 Check first set......................................................................................................................................... 167 Make a proof...........................................................................................................................................168 Print a job ticket......................................................................................................................................169 Make intermediate check prints............................................................................................................170 Printing.......................................................................................................................................................... 171 Print a waiting job ................................................................................................................................. 171 Print a scheduled job immediately....................................................................................................... 172 Reprint a job........................................................................................................................................... 173 Print variable data jobs..........................................................................................................................174 Stop printing...........................................................................................................................................175 Print in transaction printing mode........................................................................................................176 Keep the system printing.............................................................................................................................178 Monitor printing with the schedule...................................................................................................... 178 Remove printed output from the stacker/stapler................................................................................ 180 Prints storage......................................................................................................................................... 183 Chapter 9 Keep the print quality high............................................................................................ 185 About calibration.......................................................................................................................................... 186 Calibrate the printer..................................................................................................................................... 188 Perform a shading correction......................................................................................................................189 Calibrate the media family...........................................................................................................................190 Chapter 10 Perform color adjustments............................................................................................ 193 About color adjustments............................................................................................................................. 194 Automatic color mismatch correction........................................................................................................ 195 Create a trapping preset.............................................................................................................................. 196 Perform a manual shading correction........................................................................................................ 198 Adjust CMYK curves for a media family.....................................................................................................200 Correct the color tones with the ACCT function........................................................................................ 203 Register the custom media for automatic gradation adjustment.............................................................205 Create a spot color....................................................................................................................................... 207 Create media families and output profiles................................................................................................. 210 Create a media family............................................................................................................................210 Create output profiles with the embedded profiler.............................................................................211 imagePRESS C850 Series 7 Contents Create G7 calibration curves with an external tool............................................................................. 213 Create G7 output profiles with the embedded profiler.......................................................................214 Chapter 11 Perform media adjustments.......................................................................................... 215 About media adjustments........................................................................................................................... 216 Correct curled output media........................................................................................................................217 Adjust the media registration......................................................................................................................218 Chapter 12 Maintain the printer........................................................................................................221 System configuration and maintenance.................................................................................................... 222 Refill toner and staples................................................................................................................................ 224 Consumables..........................................................................................................................................224 Check the filling level of the toner cartridge........................................................................................228 Replace a toner cartridge...................................................................................................................... 229 Check the filling level of the waste toner container............................................................................ 232 Replace the waste toner container....................................................................................................... 233 Check the filling level of the staple cartridge.......................................................................................235 Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit........................ 236 Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit.............238 Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit.............................. 241 Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit...................244 Remove staple and punch waste................................................................................................................ 246 Remove the staple waste...................................................................................................................... 246 Remove in the professional stacker /stapler the punch waste ..........................................................248 Remove in the standard stacker / stapler the punch waste................................................................250 Clean print system parts.............................................................................................................................. 251 Cleaning tasks and procedures.............................................................................................................251 Clean the control panel..........................................................................................................................252 Clean the glass plate area..................................................................................................................... 253 Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area........................................................................ 254 Clean the scanning sensors.................................................................................................................. 256 Clean the rollers of the automatic document feeder.......................................................................... 257 Clean the inside of the print module.................................................................................................... 258 Clean the corona assembly wires.........................................................................................................259 Clean the clean roller............................................................................................................................. 260 Clean the fixing pressure belt............................................................................................................... 261 Refresh the fixing belt............................................................................................................................262 Maintain print system parts.........................................................................................................................263 Lubricate a die set.................................................................................................................................. 263 Perform operator maintenance tasks in the print module................................................................. 264 Chapter 13 Configure the printer...................................................................................................... 265 Default printer settings................................................................................................................................ 266 Configure the accessibility.................................................................................................................... 266 Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode...................................................... 267 Configure time settings......................................................................................................................... 272 Configure system of measurement...................................................................................................... 274 Configure printer adjustments..............................................................................................................275 Default job settings...................................................................................................................................... 282 Configure information bars...................................................................................................................282 Configure color bars.............................................................................................................................. 284 Configure the font of page numbers.................................................................................................... 285 Configure banner pages and trailer pages.......................................................................................... 286 Configure media of banner pages, trailer pages, tickets, separator sheets, and covers................. 288 Configure intermediate check prints.................................................................................................... 291 8 imagePRESS C850 Series Contents Configure finisher settings.................................................................................................................... 292 Configure print quality settings............................................................................................................ 299 Configure PostScript, PDF, and PPML job defaults.............................................................................302 Default workflow settings............................................................................................................................ 306 Configure remote workload planning.................................................................................................. 306 Configure printing workflows............................................................................................................... 307 Configure the storage of printed jobs.................................................................................................. 310 Configure the DoxBox function............................................................................................................ 311 Configure automated workflows.......................................................................................................... 312 Configure hotfolders..............................................................................................................................319 Media management..................................................................................................................................... 322 Configure the media catalog.................................................................................................................322 Configure the media.............................................................................................................................. 324 Configure the media families................................................................................................................326 Color management.......................................................................................................................................328 Configure printer calibration.................................................................................................................328 Configure color defaults........................................................................................................................ 330 Configure color presets......................................................................................................................... 335 Configure input profiles.........................................................................................................................339 Configure output profiles...................................................................................................................... 341 Configure composite output profiles................................................................................................... 343 Configure spot colors and spot color libraries.................................................................................... 345 Configure color mappings.....................................................................................................................351 Transaction printing..................................................................................................................................... 355 Configure the transaction printing....................................................................................................... 355 Configure transaction setups................................................................................................................ 356 Open and load a transaction setup.......................................................................................................358 Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup..............................................................................359 Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup..................................................................................365 Configure the resource management.................................................................................................. 370 Chapter 14 Help.................................................................................................................................. 373 Problem Solving........................................................................................................................................... 374 Optimize the scan quality of the print system........................................................................................... 376 Fix "density not within required range" error............................................................................................ 377 Chapter 15 References....................................................................................................................... 379 Job settings...................................................................................................................................................380 Print job settings.................................................................................................................................... 380 Copy job settings................................................................................................................................... 385 Scan job settings....................................................................................................................................388 Status indicators...........................................................................................................................................390 Job status indicators..............................................................................................................................390 Paper tray indicators..............................................................................................................................391 Media indicators.....................................................................................................................................392 Media specifications.....................................................................................................................................393 Supported media types per paper input option.................................................................................. 393 Supported media sizes per paper input option................................................................................... 395 Supported envelope types per paper input option............................................................................. 396 Feed direction............................................................................................................................................... 397 Feed direction for stapling.................................................................................................................... 397 Feed direction for punching.................................................................................................................. 401 Feed direction for folding...................................................................................................................... 402 Feed direction for the inserter...............................................................................................................404 Feed instruction for envelopes............................................................................................................. 406 Feed instruction for tab paper...............................................................................................................408 Zoom function.............................................................................................................................................. 409 imagePRESS C850 Series 9 Contents More PRISMAsync color information......................................................................................................... 410 Specifications................................................................................................................................................411 Overview of licenses..............................................................................................................................411 Print system specifications....................................................................................................................412 Paper input specifications..................................................................................................................... 414 Finishing and delivery specifications .................................................................................................. 419 Settings Editor specifications................................................................................................................430 Index.................................................................................................................................431 10 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 1 Introduction About the imagePRESS C850 Series About the imagePRESS C850 Series The imagePRESS C850 Series is a sheed-fed digital press printing at 85 ipm, 75 ipm, or 65 ipm. The printer platform supports a wide range of media and has a versatile in-line finishing portfolio. The imagePRESS C850 Series steered by PRISMAsync Print Server offers digital workflows— black & white and full color—into one effective and productive platform. Working with the imagePRESS C850 Series, is more than working with the printer alone. The most important standard software applications are the following. • The controller PRISMAsync Print Server ensures you to get the most out of your printer. PRISMAsync Print Server is used for a wide range of Canon and Océ color and black & white sheet-fed printers. • The web-based PRISMAsync Remote Manager shows the job processing and the print queues of the printer remotely on your workstation. All upcoming events can be monitored from a distance. You can edit job properties or re-route jobs from a PRISMAsync printer to an other PRISMAsync printer. • The PRISMAsync Remote Control app on your smartphone helps to stay informed about the print production on the imagePRESS C850 Series. Even at a distance. • The web-based Settings Editor is the tool where you configure the printer according to new or changed requirements. In addition to these standard applications, the following optional software applications can be part of the platform of the imagePRESS C850 Series. • PRISMAprepare and PRISMAproduction The job submitting software PRISMAprepare and PRISMAproduction create a uniform workflow with the imagePRESS C850 Series. So you can realize end-to-end job automation, media catalog synchronization, and all-in-one job preparation. • PRISMAlytics Dashboard The PRISMAlytics Dashboard is a cloud service that delivers fact-based printer information. Printers that use the PRISMAsync Print Server send real-time production information, such as printing times, idle times, and the usage of media and consumables to the Dashboard. Key performance indicators and improvement areas help you to optimize and streamline the production across your printer fleet. 12 Chapter 1 - Introduction imagePRESS C850 Series Information in this operation guide Information in this operation guide Read this operation guide to learn what this product can do for you, how to operate and maintain the print system and how to use it in a safe way. The guide starts with basic information on the printer (chapter 2), how to work with the printer (chapter 3), and media handling (chapter 4). Next the guide describes how you can prepare print jobs, copy jobs, and scan jobs (Chapter 5). Then, the guide explains how you can plan and monitor the workload of jobs remotely (Chapter 6). The way you can plan and print the jobs from the control panel is described in the next chapters. (Chapters 7 and 8) Calibration is very important for keeping the color quality high (Chapter 9). For specific cases there are color and media adjustments (Chapter 10 and 11). Maintenance instructions teach you how to keep the print system clean and the performance high (Chapter 12). The next chapter describes the configuration options of the Settings Editor. (Chapter 13) When you encounter problems, you find some useful solutions on common problems. (Chapter 14) The reference chapter gives you topics with detailed information and specifications about your product and the product supplies (Chapter 15). Optionals described in this manual This operation guide includes the functions and descriptions of the following finishing optionals: • Document Insertion Unit-N1 • Paper Folding Unit-F1 • Staple Finisher-W1 PRO / Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO • Staple Finisher-T1 / Booklet Finisher-T1 Other product information On the downloads site downloads.oce.com you find the following information for the imagePRESS C850 Series: • This manual • High Capacity Stacker-H1 operation guide • Technical reference guide • Safety guides of the PRISMAsync Print Server and optionals • imagePRESS C850 Series Third party software The following optionals have a manual that is delivered together with the product: • Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1 • Perfect Binder-E1 • Booklet Trimmer-F1 • Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 1 - Introduction 13 Users of the print system Users of the print system Print environments where the imagePRESS C850 Series is installed differ in many aspects. Therefore, it is difficult to describe general roles that are applicable to each situation. The imagePRESS C850 Series has default user accounts that are related to the access of passwordprotected software or settings. However, the default user groups can be adjusted by the system administrator according to the number or type of users in your organization. The tasks related to specific phases of the job workflow give a more uniform picture. Most print environments split tasks between job preparation, job planning, print production, printer maintenance, and printer configuration. Because of complexity of media definitions and color management, many print environments have experts on these areas as well. Below you find five different roles that are used in this operation guide. • The tasks of the expert focus on how to translate media and color quality requirements of customers into system and job settings. • The tasks of the prepress focus on the translation of specific customer requests into job settings. They can work with PRISMAprepare or PRISMAproduction to prepare documents or data for printing. When ready the documents are submitted to the printer. • The tasks of the operators focus on job planning, job editing, the print production, and printer maintenance. • The tasks of the key operators focus on workflow settings and job defaults. • The tasks of the system administrators focus on the user authentication, data security, and connection to other systems and servers. Aimgroup of this operation guide This operation guide is developed to support experts, operators, and key operators. 14 Chapter 1 - Introduction imagePRESS C850 Series Notes for the reader Notes for the reader Introduction This manual helps you to use the imagePRESS C850 Series. The manual contains a description of the product and guidelines to use and operate the imagePRESS C850 Series. Definition Attention Getters Parts of this manual require your special attention. These parts can provide the following: • Additional general information, for example information that is useful when you perform a task. • Information to prevent personal injuries or property damage. Symbols used in this manual The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety. Overview of the attention-getters Word Icon Indicates WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings. CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions. IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly and to avoid damaging the machine or property. NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended. - Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully and make sure not to perform the described operations. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 1 - Introduction 15 Installation precautions Installation precautions Avoid installing the machine in the following locations • Avoid locations subject to temperature and humidity extremes, whether low or high. For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters, or stoves. • Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight. If this is unavoidable, use curtains to shade the machine. Be sure that the curtains do not block the machine's ventilation slots or louvers, or interfere with the electrical cord or power supply. • Avoid poorly ventilated locations. This machine generates a slight amount of ozone etc. during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone etc. may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone etc. may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation. In addition, do not install this machine where it exhausts directly onto a person. • Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates. • Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted. 16 Chapter 1 - Introduction imagePRESS C850 Series Installation precautions • Avoid locations near volatile or flammable materials, such as alcohol or paint thinner. • Avoid locations that are subject to vibration. For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands. • Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature. If the room in which the machine is installed is cold but rapidly heated, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine. This may result in a noticeable degradation in the quality of the copied image, the inability to properly scan an original, or the copies having no printed image at all. • Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic equipment. Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the operation of such equipment. • Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios, or similar electronic equipment. The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception. Insert the power plug into a dedicated power outlet, and maintain as much space as possible between the machine and other electronic equipment. • Contact an authorized Canon dealer if communication is unavailable. Depending on your locale or your telephone connection, you may be unable to perform data communication. In this case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. • Do not remove the machine's leveling feet. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 1 - Introduction 17 Installation precautions Do not remove the machine's leveling feet after the machine has been installed. If you put weight on the front of the machine while the drawers are pulled out, the machine may fall forward. To prevent this from happening, make sure that the machine's leveling feet are in place. • Avoid installing the machine at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters above sea level, or higher. Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters above sea level, or higher. Select a safe power supply • Plug the machine into an outlet that is 208 V AC 20 A or greater. • Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady voltage. • Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to which the machine is connected. • Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock. • The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on, affixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock. • The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a loose connection and cause overheating, which could result in a fire. • If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the power cord, it may damage the power cord or the wires inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a fire. Avoid the following situations: • Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently. • Tripping over the power cord. • The power cord is bent near the connection part, and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the connection part. • Applying excessive force on the power plug. Moving the machine If you intend to move the machine, even to a location on the same floor of your building, contact your local authorized Canon dealer beforehand. Do not attempt to move the machine yourself. Provide Adequate Installation Space Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation. When the Copy Tray-R2, Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1, and control panel are attached: 18 Chapter 1 - Introduction imagePRESS C850 Series Installation precautions 1,524 mm / 60” 100 mm /4” *1 1,952 mm / 76 7/8” *1 Make sure to provide at least 800 mm / 31 1/2" of space if you attach one or more of the following: Paper Folding Unit-J1, Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1, Document Insertion Unit-N1 or Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1, Perfect Binder-E1, Perfect Binder-E1, or High Capacity Stacker-H1. When the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1, Booklet Trimmer-F1, Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO, Paper Folding Unit-J1, High Capacity Stacker-H1 (2x), Perfect Binder-E1, Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1, Document Insertion Unit-N1, Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1, control panel, and Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1 are attached: 1,000 mm / 40” or more*2 1,000 mm / 40” or more*2 7,574 mm / 298” 1,000 mm / 40” or more*2 1,765 mm / 69 ½” 800 mm / 31 ½” or more*2 *2 Make sure you provide at least 100 mm / 4" of space if none of the Paper Folding Unit-J1, Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1, Document Insertion Unit-N1, or Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1 are attached. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 1 - Introduction 19 Handling precautions Handling precautions Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. Some parts inside the machine are subject to high voltages and temperatures. Take adequate precautions when inspecting the inside of the machine. Do not carry out any inspections that are not described in the manuals for this machine. Be careful not to spill liquid or drop any foreign objects, such as paper clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit and result in a fire or electrical shock. If there is smoke, or unusual noise, immediately turn the main power switch OFF, disconnect the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your local authorized Canon dealer. Using the machine in this state may cause a fire or electrical shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the power plug so that the machine can be disconnected whenever necessary. Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front covers while the machine is in operation. This may result in paper jams. Do not use flammable sprays, such as spray glue, near the machine. There is a danger of ignition. 20 Chapter 1 - Introduction imagePRESS C850 Series Handling precautions This machine generates a slight amount of ozone etc. during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone etc. may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone etc. may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation. For safety reasons, press the sleep button when it will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight. As an added safety measure, turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, such as during consecutive holidays. Use a USB cable that is shorter than 3 meters / 9' 10" inch. Paper that has just been output from the machine may be hot. Be careful when removing or aligning paper from the output tray. Touching paper right after it is output may result in lowtemperature burns. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 1 - Introduction 21 Handling precautions 22 Chapter 1 - Introduction imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 Explore the printer Main hardware parts Main hardware parts The print system can be given different configurations to match various print environments. Your print system has basic hardware parts extended with optionals. In the table below you can find descriptions of the main parts. For more information on the optional software, see Overview of licenses on page 411. NOTE • This manual uses functional names for the print system parts. However, sometimes you may need the commercial name, for example, if you want to order an optional. In this case, use the table with the commercial names. • The availability of optionals differs per country. 3 2 5 13 12 6 7 9 8 11 1 [1] Base print system with bulk paper module 3 4 2 6 7 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 9 8 10 1 [2] Example of a print system extended with several input and output optionals Description of main hardware parts 24 1 PRISMAsync Print Server, steers the performance, workflow, image quality, and color quality of the print system. 2 Control panel, which is the central information point for the operator. 3 Operator attention light, to display the status of the print system from a distance. 4 Automatic document feeder, to copy and scan originals. 5 Cover, only needed for a print-only system. 6 Toner compartment cover, to access the toner cartridges. 7 Internal paper trays, to hold media. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Main hardware parts Description of main hardware parts 8 Print module, where the print process takes place. 9 Waste toner compartment, to access the waste toner container. 10 Paper module, to hold media. 11 Bulk paper module, to hold media. 12 Special feeder, to manually feed special media, envelopes and tab paper. 13 Output tray, to collect the printed output. 14 Inserter, to feed (preprinted) covers and insert sheets. 15 Professional puncher with replaceable die sets, to punch holes in the printed output or to crease the printed output. 16 Perfect binder, to create perfect-bound and trimmed books. 17 High capacity stacker, to stack large piles of output. 18 Folder, to fold the output in various ways. 19 Stacker/stapler, to staple and stack the printed output. A saddle-stitch unit creates saddle-stitched booklets. A punch unit punches printed output. 20 Booklet trimmer, to trim the leading edge of booklets. 21 Two-knife trimmer, to trim the top and bottom-edges of booklets. Commercial names of paper input optionals Optional Commercial name Automatic document feeder Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1 Printer cover Printer Cover-H1 Special feeder Stack Bypass-B1 / Stack Bypass Alignment Tray-C2 Paper module Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1 Bulk paper module POD Deck Lite-C1 Inserter Document Insertion Unit-N1 For more information, see Paper input specifications on page 414. Commercial names of finishing optionals Optional Commercial name Output tray Copy Tray-R2 Professional puncher Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1 Perfect binder Perfect Binder-E1 High capacity stacker High Capacity Stacker-H1 Folder Paper Folding Unit-J1 imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 25 Main hardware parts Optional Commercial name Stacker/stapler Professional stacker / stapler: Staple Finisher-W1 PRO or Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO Standard stacker / stapler: Staple Finisher-T1 or Booklet Finisher-T1 Booklet trimmer Booklet Trimmer-F1 Two-knife booklet trimmer Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 For more information, see Finishing and delivery specifications on page 419. 26 Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Print module parts Print module parts The print module had several ports and connectors to connect it to optionals and other equipment. Access the print module when a paper jam occurs or to perform maintenance tasks. 4 1 5 3 6 7 2 [3] External view Description print module 1 Main power switch, to turn on the print module and optionals. 2 Right-hand cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 3 Internal paper trays, to hold the media. 4 LAN port, to connect the print module to the print server. 5 Left-hand cover, to access the paper path to clear a paper jam. 6 Breaker, to detect an excess current or a current leakage. 7 Test button, to test the circuit breaker. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 27 Print module parts 4 6 3 5 1 2 [4] Internal view Description 28 1 Front cover, to access the fixing transport unit when a paper jam occurs. 2 Handle, to pull out the fixing transport unit when a paper jam occurs. 3 Toner compartment cover, to access the toner cartridges. 4 Toner cartridges. 5 Waste toner container, to collect wasted toner. 6 Left-hand cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs or to access the waste toner container. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Paper Input Paper Input Paper module The print module has three internal paper trays with a total capacity of 1,500 sheets. (Print module parts on page 27) The paper module (Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1) increases the input capacity of the print system. Each paper tray can hold up to 2,000 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond or 64 g/m² / 17 lb bond). (Paper input specifications on page 414) 1 2 3 [5] Paper module (Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1) Description paper module 1 Front cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 2 Tray buttons, to open a paper tray. 3 Paper trays, to hold the media. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 29 Bulk paper module Bulk paper module The print module has three internal paper trays with a total capacity of 1,500 sheets. (Print module parts on page 27) The input capacity of the print system can be extended with a bulk paper module (POD Deck LiteC1). This bulk paper module can hold up to 3,500 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond). (Paper input specifications on page 414) 1 2 3 [6] Bulk paper module (POD Deck Lite-C1) Description bulk paper module 30 1 Release button, to move the bulk paper module. 2 Button, to open the paper tray. 3 Paper tray, to hold the media. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Inserter Inserter The inserter (Document Insertion Unit-N1) enables you to use insert sheets, such as preprinted sheets and booklet covers. The print system cannot print media that comes from the inserter, instead you can use preprinted media. Each paper tray can hold up to 200 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond). (Paper input specifications on page 414) 3 4 2 1 5 [7] Inserter (Document Insertion Unit-N1) Description inserter 1 Upper tray, to place media. 2 Lower tray, to place media. 3 Lower tray cover, to access the lower tray. 4 Sliding guides, to place the media in the correct position in the tray. 5 Front cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 31 Automatic document feeder Automatic document feeder The automatic document feeder (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1) enables you to copy or scan a set of originals. The automatic document feeder scans both sides of the originals at the same time. (Paper input specifications on page 414) 1 2 3 12 9 4 5 8 7 6 11 10 [8] Automatic document feeder (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1) Description automatic document feeder 32 1 Cover, to access the original feed path when a paper jam occurs. 2 Originals input indicator, to indicate that originals are in the automatic document feeder. 3 Originals tray, to place the originals. 4 Auxiliary originals tray, to place large originals (A3 / 11" x 17"). 5 Auxiliary originals receiving tray, to collect scanned, large originals. 6 Originals receiving tray, to collect scanned originals. 7 Paper guides, to place the originals in the correct position in the tray. 8 Originals output indicator, to indicate that the automatic document feeder scans the originals. 9 Scan area, where the automatic document feeder scans the originals. 10 Glass plate, to place an original, such as a page of a book, a heavy or delicate document, or a transparency. 11 Cover, to access the scan area to clean. 12 Handle (ADF Access Handle), as support equipment to close the automatic document feeder. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Special feeder Special feeder The special feeder (Stack Bypass-B1) enables you to feed media manually, for example, when you need only a few sheets of special media for your job. The special feeder can hold up to 100 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond). (Paper input specifications on page 414) 1 2 3 [9] Special feeder (Stack Bypass-B1) Description special feeder 1 Sliding guides, to place the media in the correct position in the tray. 2 Auxiliary guide, to place large media (A3 / 11" x 17" or A4R / LTRR). 3 Alignment guides, to prevent skewed images. The alignment tray (Stack Bypass Alignment Tray-C2) prevents skewed images and ensures that media are fed straight ahead. You cannot use the auxiliary tray in combination with the alignment tray. CAUTION If the POD Deck Lite-C1 is attached, do not insert your hands in the gap between the Stack Bypass Alignment Tray-C2 and thePOD Deck Lite-C1 when clearing paper jams. 1 2 [10] Alignment tray (Stack Bypass Alignment Tray-C2) Description alignment tray 1 Screws, to attach or loosen the alignment tray. 2 Alignment guides, to place the media in the correct position in the tray. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 33 Special feeder 2 1 [11] Extension guides for long sheets (Long Sheet Tray-B1) The extension guides for long sheets (Long Sheet Tray-B1) enable you to feed long sheets, for example when you need to print book jackets, banners, posters, or maps. The special feeder can hold up one sheet. Description extension guides 34 1 Extension guides, to place the long sheets in the correct position in the tray. 2 Extension guides, to collect long sheets. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing and delivery Finishing and delivery Professional stacker / stapler There are two professional stacker / stapler configurations: the stacker / stapler with booklet maker (Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO) and without booklet maker (Staple Finisher-W1 PRO). The booklet maker folds and staples booklets. Both finisher configurations can enable the optional punch unit to punch two, three or four holes in the printed output. (Finishing and delivery specifications on page 419, Finishing for your output on page 78) The dashboard of the control panel displays the status of the staple cartridges. When the color of the staple icon is orange or red, the staple cartridge needs replacement. 1 1 6 6 5 5 2 2 4 3 [12] Professional stacker / stapler with booklet maker (Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO) and without booklet maker (Staple Finisher-W1 PRO) Description stacker/stapler 1 Cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 2 Cover, to access the area where you replace staple cartridges, clear a paper jam, or clear a staple jam. 3 Booklet tray, to collect booklets. 4 Auxiliary booklet tray, to collect large booklets. 5 Lower tray, to collect finished output. The guides enable correct placement of the printed output. 6 Upper tray, to collect finished output. The guides enable correct placement of the printed output. Extension guides for long sheets are attached to this tray. (Special feeder on page 33) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 35 Professional stacker / stapler 2 1 [13] Internal view of the stacker/stapler and saddle-stitch unit (Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO ) Description internal parts of stacker/stapler 36 1 Punch waste tray, to collect the punch waste. 2 Staple waste tray, to collect the staple waste. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Standard stacker / stapler Standard stacker / stapler There are two standard stacker / stapler configurations: the stacker / stapler with booklet maker (Booklet Finisher-T1) and without a booklet maker (Staple Finisher-T1). The booklet maker folds and staples booklets. Both finisher configurations can enable the optional punch unit to punch two, three or four holes in the printed output. (Finishing and delivery specifications on page 419, Finishing for your output on page 78) The dashboard of the control panel displays the status of the staple cartridges. When the color of the staple icon is orange or red, the staple cartridge needs replacement. 1 2 1 9 9 8 8 3 7 47 4 6 5 [14] Standard stacker / stapler with booklet maker (Booklet Finisher-T1) and without booklet maker (Staple FinisherT1) Description stacker / stapler 1 Cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 2 Punch unit cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 3 Punch unit cover, to remove the punch waste or to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 4 Cover, to access the area where you replace staple cartridges, clear a paper jam, or clear a staple jam. 5 Booklet tray, to collect booklets. 6 Auxiliary booklet tray, to collect large booklets. 7 Lower tray, to collect finished output. 8 Upper tray, to collect finished output. Extension guides for long sheets are attached to this tray. (Special feeder on page 33) 9 Top tray, to collect finished output. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 37 Professional puncher Professional puncher The professional puncher (Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1) supports replaceable dies to punch various punch patterns or crease printed output. One die set can be active, so you must replace die sets when creasing and punching are part of your daily jobs. (Finishing and delivery specifications on page 419, Finishing for your output on page 78) NOTE For more information on how to use the professional puncher, see the operation guide of the Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1. 1 2 [15] Professional puncher ( Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1) Description professional puncher 38 1 Control panel, to view the status of the puncher and to operate the puncher when you need to replace a crease die or punch die. 2 Front cover, to access the die sets and to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Folder Folder The folder (Paper Folding Unit-J1) folds the printed output in various ways: Z-fold, half-fold, trifold in, tri-fold out, parallel fold. (Finishing and delivery specifications on page 419, Finishing for your output on page 78) 1 2 3 [16] Folder (Paper Folding Unit-J1) Description folder 1 Front cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 2 Folding unit cover, to access the paper path when a paper jam occurs. 3 Tray, to collect folded output. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 2 - Explore the printer 39 Copy tray Copy tray The copy tray (Copy Tray-R2) collects the printed output. The copy tray is part of the print module. Printed output goes to the copy tray when no other finishing optionals are part of the print system. (Main hardware parts on page 24, Finishing and delivery specifications on page 419) The copy tray can have extension guides to collect long sheets. (Special feeder on page 33) 1 2 [17] Copy tray (Copy Tray-R2) Description 40 1 Auxiliary tray, to collect large, printed output (A3 / 11" x 17" or A4R / LTRR). 2 Copy tray, to collect printed output. Chapter 2 - Explore the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 Getting started What can this print system do for you? What can this print system do for you? The imagePRESS C850 Series is an easy-to-use multitasking print system that offers many useful functions. Across the whole print workflow the central media catalog with a wide range of media definitions is available. This ensures first-time-right output. (Learn about the media-based workflow on page 43) Whether the operator wants to use the already set defaults and color presets or make detail changes with the expert color management functions, a high and consistent color quality will be achieved. (Learn about the color-based workflow on page 44) PRISMAsync supports a structured document printing workflow to make the best use of staff resources and expertise. (Learn about the document printing workflow on page 46) You can use the print system in two modes: document printing and transaction printing. (Learn about the document printing workflow on page 46, Learn about the transaction printing workflow on page 47) You can define the same job properties from several locations: in Remote Printer Driver, the control panel, and Remote Manager. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) The input and finishing optionals support many different media types and finishing options. The print system can staple, fold, trim, or punch the printed output in various ways. You can print professional looking, high quality output, such as stapled booklets and books with glued, preprinted covers. (Media for your output on page 76, Finishing for your output on page 78) Remote tools help you to operate the printer from a distance. The web-based PRISMAsync Remote Manager application offers remote workload and job planning across the printer fleet from one central overview. The Remote Control App ensures you stay informed about the print production on your printers. (Plan the workload remotely on page 133) 42 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Explore the ease of operation Explore the ease of operation Learn about the media-based workflow The media catalog is the backbone of the media-based workflow. The media catalog contains the media that the print system supports. The prepress staff select the media for the job from the media catalog. The control panel shows the operator the media the job needs. The media and color defaults are defined in the media catalog. Prepress staff selects the required media from the media catalog. The operator can change job media and manage media in the catalog. The operator loads and assigns the media in the paper trays. [18] Media-based workflow During the initial configuration of the print system, the media catalog is filled with media and media attributes. Media belong to a media family, which ensures optimal color output settings. (Learn about the color-based workflow on page 44) When you work with the media catalog, you can take advantage of the following benefits: • The media in the media catalog store print quality attributes that the entire print system uses. Each time you select the media from the media catalog, the print system automatically applies the same print quality settings. • The control panel shows the operator which media to load. • The control panel, Remote Printer Driver and the PRISMA software access the same media catalog. • You can also use the media catalog for copy jobs. Define the media attributes on the control panel or with the Settings Editor. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) The system administrator determines if operators are allowed to manage the media catalog from the control panel. (Configure the media catalog on page 322) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 43 Learn about the color-based workflow Learn about the color-based workflow PRISMAsync color reproduction The color management of PRISMAsync controls the reproduction of colors and handles the conversion of input colors (RGB, CMYK, spot colors) to printed colors on paper. PRISMAsync has two instruments for easy color management across the entire workflow, colour presets and media families, so that the operator does not need to perform color management tasks on a jobby-job basis. Key operators can use the Settings Editor for color management functions. Color Presets The PRISMAsync color presets simplify the complexity of color management. You select an appropriate color preset when you prepare a print job with Remote Printer Driver or PRISMA software. The definition of an automated workflow and a hotfolder also include a color preset selection. The use of color presets saves time and does not require an in-depth knowledge on color. [19] The color presets in PRISMAsync Remote Printer Driver PRISMAsync includes the following default color presets: • Office documents This color preset is optimal for color reproduction of text and graphic lines in office documents. PRISMAsync converts the colors to more saturated colors for the printed output. • Photographic content This color preset is optimal for the reproduction of photographs, pictures, and images. Create new color presets in the Settings Editor. (Configure color presets on page 335) 44 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about the color-based workflow Media Families A media family is a set of media that has comparable print quality specifications, such as surface type, color and substrate type. A media family defines the color output profiles for the media. Each media family has three different output profiles, for the halftone screens Normal, Fine, and Error-diffusion. When you have more than one halftone screen in a single job or page, PRISMAsync automatically applies the related output profiles for optimal color management in the job. When you add new media to the media catalog, you specify the media family. Advanced color management The Advanced color management license offers the following color features: • Device simulation, to simulate or proof other print engines or offset presses with your print system. • Device Link support, to import Device Link profiles for special CMYK conversions. • Named color profile import and export, to extend the functionality of spot color libraries. • Information bars, to print extra metadata on printed output. There is one default information bar, but you can compose other information bars. Information bar selection is possible in Remote Printer Driver, PRISMAprepare, and via automated workflows or hotfolders. • Color control bars, to print extra color patches for control of color output via FOGRA verification. Using a color bar you can check the ink density, dot grain and contrast. Use default or compose custom color bars. The color bar selection is available in the Remote Printer Driver, PRISMAprepare, and via automated workflows or hotfolders. • Color mappings, to convert RGB, CMYK to a specific color, for example, your corporate color. Color mappings are useful to map colors in the input file to a fixed color of a spot color library. • Leave out separations, to exclude specific spot colors from printing. You can exclude layers for printing when you map the colors of these layers to a spot color with the value “None”. • Embedded profiling, to create your own ICC or G7 output profiles with the embedded color profiler. For more PRISMAsync color information, see More PRISMAsync color information on page 410. Calibration Daily printer calibration is very important to maintain high quality color reproduction. Media family calibration is important to maintain consistent color reproduction levels for all the media you use. The control panel indicates when printer calibration is needed. (About calibration on page 186) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 45 Learn about the document printing workflow Learn about the document printing workflow The document printing workflow describes the route from the job preparation to the finishing and delivery of the printed output. The document printing workflow has four phases: 1. Job preparation Prepress staff defines the print document and job settings, and submits the print job to the PRISMAsync printer. The prepress staff uses PRISMA software, Remote Printer Driver, automated workflows or hotfolders to prepare and submit the jobs. 2. Workload planning Remote Manager is used to monitor the connected print systems, paper trays, scheduled jobs, and upcoming actions to manage the workload across all connected print systems. 3. Job planning Print jobs arrive in one of the following PRISMAsync job locations: a DocBox, the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs. The active workflow profile determines how PRISMAsync routes the jobs. 4. Print production The print system prints and finishes jobs according to the job sequence in the list of scheduled jobs. Job preparation PRISMAprepare PRISMAsync driver Remote Manager Workload planning Job planning DocBox Print production Waiting jobs Printed jobs Scheduled jobs [20] Job workflow for document printing mode 46 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about the transaction printing workflow Learn about the transaction printing workflow When there is a license for transaction printing (IPDS or PCL), you can operate the print system in the transaction printing mode. An IPDS or PCL host sends a streaming job to a dedicated port in the print system. The transaction printing mode fits print environments with large numbers of business critical data, such as invoices, checks and salary slips. Typical for the transaction print mode is that first non-variable parts of a print job are stored on the print server and then merged with the variable parts of the print job. Job preparation PRISMAproduction Data input Applications to prepare and submit job stream Preflight and make ready Job planning Job scheduling and monitor Print production Scheduled jobs [21] Job workflow for transaction printing mode During daily work, you can switch between the transaction printing and document printing modes without rebooting the print system. When the transaction printing mode is active, the print system still accepts PDF and PostScript jobs. However, PRISMAsync starts to process these jobs, when you switch off the transaction printing mode. PDF containers in the data streams The transaction printing mode can be extended with an Adobe PDF Print Engine (Adobe PDF for IPDS) license. This license allows you to process PDF containers in the data streams. Differences between the two printing modes The transaction printing mode is different from the document printing mode in several respects: 1. All data in one connection session are part of the same streaming job. This streaming job can have job separators. In this instance, you can see the different job names on the control panel. 2. The print resolution for IPDS is 240, 300, 600 dpi, or automatically detected. 3. When the transaction printing jobs contain paper tray selection numbers, you can select a mapping method. The paper tray number corresponds to a physical tray or to media from the catalog: • Tray-to-media mapping imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 47 Learn about the transaction printing workflow You can assign the paper tray number included in the print job to a physical paper tray. You select media from the media catalog and link these to a logical tray, indicated by a number. The print system maps the media of the logical tray to the physical paper trays that hold these media. For color management, the output profile associated with the media family of the media is used. The control panel shows the media which the job uses. • Tray-to-tray mapping You specify which logical tray (indicated by a number) corresponds to a physical paper tray. The print system will use the media that are loaded in the physical paper tray to which the job refers via a logical tray. Also other paper trays that contain these media are used when needed. The control panel shows the media which the job uses. For color management, the output profile associated with the media family of the media is used. 4. Color management in the transaction mode works in a similar way to the document printing mode. However, there are some different color conversion functions: • You cannot overrule the input profiles attached to the data stream. • You can choose to keep or ignore the output color profile in the data stream. • You cannot calibrate the printer when the transaction printing mode is active. Transaction printing setups A transaction printing setup is a collection of preset print settings for a transaction job, such as output location, data resolution, face orientation, offset stacking, font capture, and logical page size. Create transaction printing setups in the Settings Editor. (Configure the transaction printing on page 355) Work in transaction printing mode When you want to print in the transaction printing mode, first activate the transaction mode and establish the connection with the IPDS or PCL host. When you print in the transaction printing mode, the schedule informs you which types of media the streaming job uses. The schedule cannot predict the time needed for a streaming job. (Monitor printing with the schedule on page 178) Image adjustment You can create a transaction printing preset with an image shift definition. This is useful for better alignment of variable data, such as names or addresses, on the page. You define the image shift on the control panel, but also in the Settings Editor. Secure error recovery When an job error occurs in transaction printing mode, the job recovery takes place from the page that caused the error. When multiple pages of the same document are not allowed, for example, for lotteries and bank accounts, you must adjust the error recovery settings. When you select the secure error recovery in the Settings Editor, the print system does not perform an output recovery and deletes all remaining pages. A stack eject follows when the printed output goes to the high capacity stacker. As a result, you must submit the job again. 48 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about automated workflows Learn about automated workflows PRISMAsync offers a job workflow with multiple print queues via automated workflows. You can create and assign job properties to specific print queues. An automated workflow automatically links print settings to jobs so that you do not need an application to open a document, define individual job settings and submit the job. The use of automated workflows has the advantage that you can increase the print production of PDF files. Reuse the automatic workflow for printing similar print files. PRISMAsync has one default automated workflow. Create other automated workflows in the Settings Editor. (Configure automated workflows on page 312) Some brief instructions follow. Ready-to-print documents Kpc!qsfqbsbujpo Kpc!qmboojoh Xbjujoh!kpct Qsjou!qspevdujpo DocBox Tdifevmfe! kpct [22] Document printing via an automated workflow There are several ways to address an automated workflow: • Use the lpr command line. Print files are submitted via the lpr command to PRISMAsync. The automated workflow attributes determine the job properties. Command: lpr -S-P NOTE The default Windows installation does not install the lpr command. Make sure this Windows feature is turned on. • Use hotfolders. The automated workflow that is attached to the hotfolder determines the job properties. (Configure hotfolders on page 319) • Use PRISMAprepare. (Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare on page 116) • Use Remote Manager. (Use Remote Manager to plan the workload on page 134) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 49 Interact with the imagePRESS C850 Series Interact with the imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about interaction screens There are several ways to interact with the imagePRESS C850 Series. You use the control panel to interact locally and PRISMAsync Remote Manager to interact remotely. Both screens allow you to operate the printer and monitor the print process. The PRISMAsync Remote Control app shows alerts and messages on your mobile device to inform you of a required immediate action. For some configuration tasks you use the control panel, but in most cases you use the Settings Editor. Below you find an introduction about how to interact with these screens. Control panel The control panel is local point to operate the printer and the domain of the operator and the maintenance operator. Many instructions in this operation guide explain job editing and job management from the control panel. 11 10 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 The table below describes the main parts of the control panel and their functions. Description control panel 50 1 Sleep button , to put the print system into the sleep mode or to wake the print system from the sleep mode. 2 Stop button ble. 3 Paper tray button , to access paper tray functions and overviews while the active window remains available. 4 USB port, to enable printing from a USB drive or connecting the i1 spectrophotometer. 5 [Schedule] button, to access the schedule. 6 [Jobs] button, to access job locations: list of scheduled jobs, list of waiting jobs, list of printed jobs, list of scan jobs and the DocBox folders with their jobs. Chapter 3 - Getting started , to stop the print process, after a set, after a record, or as soon as possi- 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about interaction screens Description control panel 7 [Trays] button, to access paper tray functions and overviews (see the paper tray button (3)). 8 [System] button, to access system and support features, maintenance tasks, consumable supplies, and workflow preferences 9 Access key button , to display the user name that is currently logged in, log in as another user, and to change your password. 10 Dashboard, to display all kinds of status information. 11 Status LED, to indicate the system status with a color. PRISMAsync Remote Manager PRISMAsync Remote Manager shows the print queues and jobs on the connected PRISMAsync printers. You can edit the jobs or re-route them to an other printer. You start the software application at the Settings Editor. PRISMAsync Remote Manager is a perfect solution for central operators that wish to do job management, job editing, and job monitoring from a remote workstation. This operation guide only describes the main tasks of PRISMAsync Remote Manager. Use the help function of PRISMAsync Remote Manager for more information. [23] Start Remote Manager 4 1 2 3 [24] Print queue of a printer Description 1 List of printers that are configured for PRISMAsync Remote Manager. The printer on top of the list is selected. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 4 51 Learn about interaction screens Description 2 The lists of scheduled jobs on the selected printer. The toolbars have buttons to move, add, edit, and print jobs. 3 The lists of waiting jobs on the selected printer. 4 The DocBox and list of printed jobs. PRISMAsync Remote Control The PRISMAsync Remote Control app helps the central operator to stay informed about the print production on the available PRISMAsync printers. Even at a distance. You receive alerts when actions, such as loading media or adding consumables, are foreseen. Or if a problem with the printer requires immediate action. The table below describes four screens of PRISMAsync Remote Control. Description 1 The configuration screen has options to indicate how you want to be informed. 2 The start screen. 3 The printer list shows the status of the available printers. 4 The event list shows the upcoming actions and the current status of the available printers. Settings Editor 1 2 3 [25] Settings Editor 52 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about interaction screens The Settings Editor is the domain of the key operator and system administrator. This web-based software application offers many functions which are explained in a separate part of this guide. (Configure the printer on page 265) The Settings Editor uses the same language as the web browser. (Settings Editor specifications on page 430) The table below describes the main parts of the Settings Editor. Description 1 The settings are grouped in main and sub tabs. 2 Use the search box to quickly find a setting. 3 Use the link to start PRISMAsync Remote Manager. A setting can show an icon to provide more information on the use. The table below explains the icons. Setting is editable Setting not editable Setting is also available on the control panel Setting can be changed with key operator or system administrator credentials imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 53 Learn about user authentication Learn about user authentication The imagePRESS C850 Series offers many security features because the printer often needs to handle sensitive documents and information. If settings and functions are not secure, someone can change jobs, re-route jobs, or change important system settings. The user authentication settings of the imagePRESS C850 Series are based on access rights and are defined according to the security policy of your company. The system administrator is responsible for the user authentication settings. Your printer can apply the factory installed user groups, default user accounts, and the default access rights per user group. But it is more likely that the printer has custom user groups or is connected to a corporate authentication server. In the latter situation, corporate domains, user groups and users identities are the base of the user authentication system of the printer. The information below describes the factory installed user groups and user accounts. Please refer to your system administrator for more information on the situation in your print environment. Factory installed access rights As a user you can be member of one or multiple user groups. The user groups to which you belong together determine which tasks you can perform and to which software applications you have access. In practice, you receive credentials or you use your own personal credentials. After logging in, you are ready to access functions and applications in line with the tasks you are responsible for. (Log in and log out on page 62) The imagePRESS C850 Series access rights are factory installed and cannot be changed or created by the system administrator. However, the system administrator can determine the access rights of the available user groups. Access rights to Location Permission Only personal jobs Control panel Allowed to plan, change, and print personal jobs All jobs Control panel and PRISMAsync Remote Manager Allowed to plan, change, and print all submitted jobs Remote tools PRISMAsync Remote Manager Allowed to run remote softand Settings Editor ware applications Maintenance tasks Control panel Configuration settings Control panel and Settings Ed- Allowed to change workflow, itor job defaults, and troubleshooting settings IT settings Settings Editor Allowed to perform cleaning and maintenance procedures Allowed to change IT, security, and connectivity settings Default user groups The imagePRESS C850 Series has five default user groups that have the following user rights by default. The system administrator can assign more or fewer user rights to a default user group. 54 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about user authentication Default user group Only per‐ sonal jobs All jobs Remote tools Mainte‐ nance tasks Configura‐ tion set‐ tings IT settings Operators Central operators Key operators Maintenance operators System administrators Default user accounts After installation of the printer, each default user group has a single default user account having default credentials. For security reasons, it is strongly advised to change the default passwords as soon as possible. Default user group Default user account Operators Operator Central operators Central operator Key operators Key operator Maintenance operators Maintenance operator System administrators System administrator Custom user groups The system administrator can decide to create other user groups that better match the print environment or use corporate user groups. In the following example the system administrator has defined two new custom user groups for his print environment. Custom user group Only per‐ sonal jobs All jobs Remote tools Mainte‐ nance tasks Configura‐ tion set‐ tings IT settings External operators Internal operators System administrators imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 55 Learn about printer status Learn about printer status The vertical status bar on the dashboard, the status LED on the control panel, and the operator attention light show the same status color. PRISMAsync Remote Manager and PRISMAsync Remote Control display the status color remotely. You can change the warning time or disable warnings. Choose a warning time that gives you sufficient time to prepare media or remove prints without a printer stop. (Adjust the control panel on page 64) 2 3 1 [26] The status bar on the dashboard (1), the control panel (2) and the operator attention light (3) Color Action required Green informs that there is no action expected soon. Orange warns that you must refill paper trays, add toner, add staples, or remove prints soon. Red warns that you must perform an action immediately because the printer cannot continue printing. This can have the following causes: 1. Media for the current job is not available. 2. One or more output trays are full. 3. One of the waste containers is absent or full. 4. A paper jam has occurred. Keep printing with the schedule The schedule is a daily up to eight-hour plan board on the control panel. It shows the list of scheduled jobs and predicts their job production time. The orange warning color inform you about upcoming loading, refilling or maintenance tasks. 56 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Learn about printer status [27] Schedule with status colors When action is required The dashboard shows messages and symbols when an action is expected soon or immediately 1 2 3 4 [28] The dashboard when the print system needs you to load media The dashboard shows the printer status (1), the name and progress of the active job or streaming job (2), and messages (3) and icons (4) of expected actions. To prevent the printer from stopping, check the filling levels of supplies and waste on a regular base. Printer status The document printing mode is active. imagePRESS C850 Series The transaction printing mode is active. A calibration or maintenance task is currently performed. The Service mode is active. Chapter 3 - Getting started 57 Start the print system Start the print system Awake the printer from sleep mode In the Settings Editor you can set timers for the energy save modes. (Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode on page 267) When there is no activity during these preset periods, the system will first enter the low power mode and then the sleep mode. When enabled in the Settings Editor, the system wakes up when a job arrives in the list of scheduled jobs or when you use the control panel. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) The control panel has a sleep button to bring the print server into the sleep mode. You can use the same button to awake the print server from sleep mode. During the sleep mode the print server remains on, but the control panel light is off. With the Settings Editor you can also define the shut-down time and wake up time to ensure minimal energy consumption during nights or weekends. Procedure 1. Press the sleep button 2. Press the sleep button 58 Chapter 3 - Getting started at the right-hand side of the control panel. again to awake the system. imagePRESS C850 Series Turn on the print system Turn on the print system The print module has a main power switch to turn on the print module and all optionals. You need also to awake the print server from the sleep mode. Be aware that the print system needs time to start up. 2 1 [29] The main power switch of the print module (1) and the sleep button of the control panel (2) Procedure 1. Turn the main power switch at the upper right-hand side of the print module into the "I" position. 2. Press the sleep button at the right-hand side of the control panel. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 59 Restart the print system Restart the print system You can restart the print system from the control panel, when needed. The Settings Editor also provides a function to restart the print system. For that procedure you must have the rights to perform system administrator tasks. (Location in the Settings Editor: [Support]→[Troubleshooting]→[Restart the system]) Procedure 1. Touch [System] -> [Setup]. 2. Touch [Shut down system]. 3. Touch [Restart]. 60 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Turn off the print system Turn off the print system Turn off the print module and all optionals using the shut down-function on the control panel. The print server goes into the sleep mode. Be aware that the print system needs time to shut down. IMPORTANT Do not use the main power switch on the print module to turn off the print system. The shutdown function via the control panel automatically changes the position of the main power switch from the 'I' to the 'O' position. Procedure 1. Touch [System] -> [Setup]. 2. Touch [Shut down system]. 3. Touch [Yes]. A message indicates when the shut-down process has started. When the shut-down process is ready, the control panel light will be off. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 61 Log in and log out Log in and log out It depends on the imagePRESS C850 Series user authentication if and how you log in. (Learn about user authentication on page 54) The bottom-right button of the screen shows the username of the user that is currently logged in. When you want to log in as another user, log out or change your password, use this button. [30] Login with default user account [31] Login with your own username When you want to Solution Log in with a default user account [32] Logging in with a default user account 1. Touch the name of the logged in user account at the bottom of the screen. 2. Select a default user account from the list. 3. Enter the username and password. 4. Press [OK]. Your user account is now visible at the bottom of the screen. 62 Chapter 3 - Getting started 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Log in and log out When you want to Solution Log in with your own user account [33] Logging in with your own user account 1. Touch the name of the logged in user account at the bottom of the screen. 2. Select [Custom] from the list. 3. Enter your username and password. 4. Press [OK]. Your user account is now visible at the bottom of the screen. Log out 1. Touch the name of the logged in user account at the bottom of the screen. 2. Press [Log out]. 3. Press [Yes]. Change your password 1. Touch the name of the logged in user account at the bottom of the screen. 2. Press [Change your password]. 3. Enter current password. 4. Enter new password and confirm new password. 5. Press [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 63 Adjust the control panel Adjust the control panel You can change several settings to adjust the control panel according to your needs or workflow. When you want to Solution Change the display language of the control panel 1. Touch [System]→[Setup]→[Language]. 2. Touch [OK]. Use of shorter job names [34] Use shorter job names 1. Touch [System]→[Setup]→[Job name truncation]→[Job name truncation]. 2. Indicate how you want to shorten the job name. 3. Touch [OK]. 64 Chapter 3 - Getting started 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Adjust the control panel When you want to Solution Adjust the readability of the control panel [35] Control panel adjustments 1. Touch [System]→[Setup]→[Control panel settings]. 2. Choose the automatic adjustment method or touch the + and - buttons to adjust the brightness and contrast manually. 4 3. Touch [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 65 Adjust the control panel When you want to Solution Adjust the warning time [36] Adjust the warning time 1. Touch [System]→[Setup]→[Warning time]. 2. Touch [Warning in advance] to enable or disable the function. 3. Touch the - or + button to decrease or increase the warning time in increments of 1 minute. 4 4. Touch [OK]. 66 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Adjust the control panel When you want to Solution Use pinch zoom gestures when you adjust CMYK curves [37] Multi-touch function 1. 2. 3. 4. imagePRESS C850 Series Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Control panel settings]. Enable the multi-touch function. Touch [OK]. Reboot the system. (Restart the print system on page 60) Chapter 3 - Getting started 67 Choose a workflow profile Choose a workflow profile A workflow profile determines the route of jobs when they arrive on PRISMAsync Print Server. (Learn about the document printing workflow on page 46) PRISMAsync provides several default workflow profiles to manage your work load on the control panel. (Job management in the queues on page 147, DocBox on page 142) Workflow profiles make it possible to plan your jobs in a flexible way. You select a workflow profile on the control panel and, if required, adjust the attributes of the workflow profile. Then, this custom workflow profile is completely fitted to your workflow. There can only be one workflow profile active at the same time. You can find the attributes of the active workflow at the top of the Workflow window. [38] The workflow profile attributes Standard workflow profile Job planning Waiting jobs Print production Scheduled jobs DocBox • The standard workflow profile fits a productive workflow with sufficient control over jobs. • Jobs go to the list of scheduled jobs and the print system prints the jobs. • The print system selects another output tray for each next job. [39] Standard workflow profile 68 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Choose a workflow profile Job by job workflow profile Job planning Waiting jobs Print production DocBox Scheduled jobs • The job-by-job workflow profile fits a workflow in which every job needs attention. • All jobs come in the list of scheduled jobs and you start the jobs one by one from the list of scheduled jobs. • The print system selects another output tray for each next job. [40] Job by job workflow profile Check and print workflow profile Jobbplanering Väntande jobb Utskriftsproduktion DocBox Planerade jobb [41] Check and print workflow profile • The check-and-print workflow profile is suitable for a workflow in which every job requires attention. You check the print quality and layout setting of the first set. • All jobs are received in the list of scheduled jobs and only the first set of the job is printed. After approval of the first set, you give the print command to print the other sets in one run. • The print system selects another output tray for each next job. Manual planning workflow profile Kpc!qmboojoh Xbjujoh! kpct Qsjou!qspevdujpo DocBox Tdifevmfe! kpct • The manual planning workflow fits a workflow in which you want to determine the print priority of the jobs. • All jobs are received in the list of waiting jobs. • The print system selects another output tray for each next job. [42] Manual planning workflow profile imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 69 Choose a workflow profile Unattended workflow profile Kpc!qmboojoh Xbjujoh! kpct Qsjou!qspevdujpo DocBox Tdifevmfe! kpct • The unattended workflow profile fits a workflow in which productivity is very important. • All jobs go to the list of scheduled jobs and are printed. • To keep the system running, you should make sure consumables remain available and you remove printed output and waste on time. [43] Unattended workflow profile Procedure 1. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Workflow profile]. 2. Select a workflow profile. 3. Adjust the workflow profile, if required. For example, change the default destination of print jobs to list of waiting jobs or enable [Check first set]. The name of the workflow profile changes into [Custom]. 4. Touch [OK]. 70 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Select an accounting mode Select an accounting mode The accounting feature on PRISMAsync stores and handles job and user information in account log files. You can customize the definition of account log files to process the logging data into your cost charts or invoices. The system administrator must define account IDs to charge job costs to departments or customers and enable the user identification in the Settings Editor. (Location in the Settings Editor: [Configuration]→[Accounting]) PRISMAsync can verify the entered account IDs, to make sure that only valid users can use the print system. When a submitted job does not have a valid account ID, PRISMAsync sends it to the list of waiting jobs. The print system will only start to process the job when a correct account ID is entered. When accounting is active, Remote Printer Driver and the control panel ask for an account ID before the print system handles the job. Define the accounting mode on the control panel to determine how PRISMAsync interacts with the operator. Accounting modes: • [Show last used ID] This mode requires authentication per job. You can see the last used account ID which you can overwrite. • [Per jobClear last used ID]. This mode requires authentication per job. You cannot see the last used account ID. • [Use default ID] This mode uses a fixed account ID, but you can change the account ID. Be aware that the fixed mode implies that the print system overrules the account ID that is entered in Remote Printer Driver. [44] Accounting modes imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 71 Select an accounting mode Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [Accounting]. Touch [Account ID per job]. Select an accounting mode. Touch [OK]. After you finish You can find the account log files in the Settings Editor. ([Configuration]→[Accounting]) 72 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Register the color tones for the ACCT function Register the color tones for the ACCT function The automatic correction color tone (ACCT) function corrects slight color deviations in the color tones that can occur over time. (Correct the color tones with the ACCT function on page 203) In order to enable the ACCT function in the future, you must first register these color tones as a reference. It is recommended to do the registration right after print system installation. The registration procedure uses an internal sensor to measure the color tones. [45] The status and options of the automatic correction color tone function Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment]. Touch [Auto Correct Color Tone] -> [Register a target condition]. Select the storage place in which you want to store the measured values of the color tones. Press [OK]. Select the media. IMPORTANT Do not stop the registration procedure before it has completed. 7. Press [OK]. 8. Follow the instructions on the control panel. 9. Close the menu. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 3 - Getting started 73 Register the color tones for the ACCT function 74 Chapter 3 - Getting started imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 Media handling Media for your output Media for your output Media catalog for media selection PRISMAsync controls the media definition centrally with the media catalog. The media-based workflow of PRISMAsync Print Server ensures convenient and intelligent media management which prevents that output doesn't meet your quality requirements. (Learn about the mediabased workflow on page 43) When a job is prepared, media is selected from the media catalog. The media catalog stores all media attributes that are important for the print quality, such as size, weight, media type, color and surface type. A media belongs to a media family. A media family is a group of media that share the same print quality specifications and uses the same color output profile. (Learn about the color-based workflow on page 44) The schedule shows the media that are assigned to the job and when it is time to load the media. You can also import a media catalog from another PRISMAsync Print Server. When this print server runs a software version lower than 4.1, you must check the media family and surface type for each media. Temporary media You can assign media that are not included in the media catalog. When the job on these temporary media is printed, you find these temporary media in the media section of the System view on the control panel. For an optimal print quality you are advised to add the temporary media with all its important media attributes to the media catalog. The temporary media remains available in the System view as long as there are jobs in the queue that use these temporary media, or these temporary media are assigned to a paper tray. Media library The print module contains a media library from where you can import media to the media catalog. Media and image quality Media has a big influence on the image quality and the productivity of a print system. The performance of a print system, the print quality and the consumption of consumables depend on media factors, such as: • Media type • Media weight • Surface • Moisture content • Smoothness To ensure optimal output quality and performance, media must comply with the paper specifications of your print system. Store the media in a dry environment away from direct sunlight. Before you load the media into the paper trays, it is important to check the media sheets. (Check and prepare media on page 86) Types of media for the paper trays The paper trays of your print system can handle a variety of media types and sizes, including uncoated, offset coated, plain, recycled, thin, satinated, tabs, textured paper, digital coated media, 76 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Media for your output preprinted media and offset coated media. You can use envelopes, tab paper and transparencies in most paper trays. For covers, insert sheets and separator sheets between sets, you can use the inserter. (Paper input specifications on page 414, Supported media types per paper input option on page 393) The following table shows the types of media that paper trays support. Thin Plain Heavy Coated Textured Vellum Transparencies *1 Recycled 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Color Prepunched Forward-order tab paper Reverse-order tab paper Labels *1 *2 Bond Letterhead Carbonless Envelope type a *1 Envelope type b *1 Preprinted covers *3 Insert sheets *3 Perforated Long sheets *1 Not supported by the inserter *2 Not supported by the internal paper trays *3 The inserter supports insert sheets. Make sure that the media you use for the inserter have the insert sheet definition in the media catalog. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 77 Finishing for your output Finishing for your output When your print system has finishing optionals, you select staple, punch, trim, booklet and book options in Remote Printer Driver, the PRISMA software, and the control panel. Below you find an overview of the finishing options the print system supports. For more information on finishing specifications and options, see Print job settings on page 380, Finishing and delivery on page 35 and Finishing and delivery specifications on page 419. Stapling Stapling options Finishing optional Stacker / stapler Corner stapling 2-side stapling The feed direction of originals is important for stapled copies. (Feed direction for stapling on page 397) Booklet making Booklet options Finishing optionals Stacker / stapler Booklet maker Saddle-stitched booklet Stacker / stapler Booklet maker Booklet trimmer Saddle-stitched booklet, leading-edge trimmed Stacker / stapler Booklet maker Booklet trimmer Two-knife booklet trimmer Saddle-stitched booklet, trimmed at three sides 78 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing for your output 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 1 5 4 6 3 1 8 6 3 5 6 7 8 [47] Print and page order of booklets Perfect binding Perfect binding options Finishing optional Perfect binder Perfect bound book Perfect bound book, trimmed at three sides Punching Punching options Finishing optionals Stacker / stapler Punch unit 4-hole punching 3-hole punching 2-hole punching imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 79 Finishing for your output Professional punching and creasing Professional punching options Finishing optionals Professional puncher Punching with various punch patterns 4-hole punching 3-hole punching 2-hole punching Single crease, at the center Folding Folding options Finishing optional Folder Z-fold Half-fold Tri-fold in Tri-fold out Parallel fold Stacking and sorting Stacking and sorting Finishing optionals 3 1 1 2 2 3 Sort by set 80 Chapter 4 - Media handling 2 1 1 2 2 Stacker / stapler High capacity stacker 1 Sort by page 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing for your output Stacking and sorting Finishing optionals Stacker / stapler High capacity stacker Offset stacked imagePRESS C850 Series Stacked Chapter 4 - Media handling 81 Manage the media catalog Manage the media catalog The print system uses a central media catalog from where you can select media for jobs. (Learn about the media-based workflow on page 43) The media catalog can be managed with the Settings Editor. When media management via the control panel is enabled, you can also manage the media catalog on the control panel. (Configure the media catalog on page 322) To use media stored in media library for a job, add these media to the media catalog. (Add media to the media catalog on page 84) 1 6 2 3 4 5 [48] Media management on the control panel Open the media catalog Touch [System] -> [Media] to open the media catalog. Organise the media catalog Task How Search media Use filters (1) to search for media with a specific size, type, weight, or name. Arrange media Click a media attribute (2) to change the order, according to the attribute. Manage the media catalog 82 Task How Edit media You can change the name, size, type, or media family of the media. (3) Delete media You can remove media which you do not need. (4) Chapter 4 - Media handling 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Manage the media catalog Task How Add media to catalog You can add temporary media to the media catalog (5). (Add temporary media to the media catalog on page 157) Copy media Use the copy function (6) to create new media, based on existing media. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 83 Add media to the media catalog Add media to the media catalog The print system uses a central media catalog from which you can select media for jobs. Correctly defined media attributes are important in order to ensure high print quality. When enabled in the Settings Editor, you can add new media to the media catalog via the control panel. You can also define whether you want media family calibration warnings and warnings on missing media attributes on the control panel. (Configure the media catalog on page 322, Media indicators on page 392) You can use the Canon media library to add new media to the media catalog. This media library provides a comprehensive list of recommended media with the correct media attributes. You can change the media name if required. [49] Media management via the control panel Procedure 1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. 2. Use one of the following methods to add new media. • Touch [Copy] to use one of the current media definitions as starting point and copy its attributes to the new media definitions. • Touch [New] to define all attributes from scratch. • Touch [New] -> [Import from media library] to import a media with correct media attributes from the media library. 84 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Add media to the media catalog 3. Define the name and attributes of the new media. NOTE For convenient retrieval of media in the media catalog, define the following media attributes: • Name • Standard type • Custom type name, when the standard type is custom IMPORTANT For optimal print quality, define the correct values for the following media attributes. Refer to the packaging of the media for this information. • Size • Weight • Surface type • Media family You can select the option to create a new media family at the same time. Ask advice from the key operator if a new media family is needed. 4. Press [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 85 Check and prepare media Check and prepare media Check and prepare media before loading Before you load media into the paper trays, it is important to check and prepare the media. When there are load and storage instructions on the paper package, follow these instructions. When you print on media that have absorbed moisture, steam may be released from the output area of the machine. This is due to the evaporation of moisture in the paper caused by the high temperature in the print module. CAUTION • When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. • Do not store media in places exposed to open flames. This can cause the paper to ignite which could result in burns or a fire. NOTE • Use paper recommended by Canon for high-quality output. • Some commercially available media types are not appropriate for your print system. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer to order media. (Consumables on page 224) For more information on media, see Media specifications on page 393, Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 88 and Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 90. Procedure Action 1 Make sure the media specifications match the paper tray specifications. (Paper input specifications on page 414) 2 Check that the media is in good condition. IMPORTANT Do not load the following media. This can cause a paper jam. • Severely curled or wrinkled paper • Thin straw paper • Heavy paper (more than 220 g/m² / 80 lb cover) • Paper printed on a thermal transfer printer • The reverse side of paper printed on a thermal transfer printer • Tracing paper 3 Remove the packaging and fan the sheets of paper several times. IMPORTANT You must fan thin paper, recycled paper, prepunched paper, heavy paper, transparencies, and tab papers before you load them. 86 Chapter 4 - Media handling 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Check and prepare media before loading Action 4 Align the edges of the sheets. 5 When the paper is curled, straighten out the paper. After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 87 Check and prepare envelopes before loading Check and prepare envelopes before loading Before you load envelopes, it is important to check and prepare the envelopes. You can load envelopes in all paper trays and the special feeder. (Supported envelope types per paper input option on page 396) IMPORTANT • Do not print on the back side of the envelopes (the side with the flap). • Do not load the following types of envelopes. This can cause a paper jam, dirty printed output or dirty machine parts: • Curled, creased, or folded envelopes • Very thick or thin envelopes • Damp or wet envelopes • Torn envelopes • Irregularly shaped envelopes • Envelopes with clasps or windows • Envelopes that are already sealed • Envelopes with holes or perforations • Envelopes with specially coated surfaces • Envelopes made of surface treated colored paper • Envelopes that are self-adhesive and use ink, glue, or other substances that can melt, burn, vaporize, or emit smells by the heat of the fixing unit (approximately 200°C). Melted glue can cause sealed envelopes. • When there is a temperature difference between the storage location and the location where the envelopes are printed, take the envelopes to the print location on time. CAUTION • When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. • Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames. This can cause the paper to ignite which could result in burns or a fire. Action 1 Make sure the media specifications match the paper tray specifications. (Paper input specifications on page 414) 2 Take five envelopes and fix curls or bends. 3 Loosen and stack the five envelopes together. 4 88 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Check and prepare envelopes before loading Action 4 Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press the complete envelope surface five times to remove any curls. 5 Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that the envelopes stay flat. * = Flap * 6 Remove air and creases to flatten the envelopes. * = Flap * After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 89 Check and prepare transparencies before loading Check and prepare transparencies before loading Transparencies have a different front and back side. Make sure you load transparencies so that the print system prints on the front side. IMPORTANT • Do not load transparencies while the print system is printing. This can cause a paper jam. • Only use transparencies intended for your print system. Other transparencies can damage the print system. • Only hold the edges of the sheets and avoid touching the print surface. • When transparencies stick together, fan the stack and do not load more than 100 sheets. Use new transparencies when a paper jam occurs. • Immediately take printed transparencies from the output tray to avoid folded transparencies. This can cause a paper jam. For more information, see: Procedure 1. Make sure the media specifications match the paper tray specifications. (Paper input specifications on page 414) Only use A4 / LTR or A4R / LTRR transparencies. (Supported media types per paper input option on page 393) 2. Remove the packaging and check that the transparencies are in good condition. After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place away from direct sunlight. 90 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load media Load media Load media into the internal paper trays Each of the three internal paper trays can hold up to 550 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond). The paper trays feed the media face down. (Print module parts on page 27) There is no sensor in the paper trays that can detect the media. After you open and close a paper tray, the print system will not change the media settings. When you load envelopes in an internal paper tray, you need the envelope guide (Envelope Feeder Attachment-F1). (Load envelopes into the internal paper trays on page 107, Supported envelope types per paper input option on page 396) [50] Location of the internal paper trays IMPORTANT • Never place paper or other objects in the empty parts of a paper tray. This can cause a paper jam. • Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load the media correctly, a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414) (Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) (Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 90) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) Procedure Action 1 Grip the handle and pull out the paper tray until it stops. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 91 Load media into the internal paper trays Action 2 Remove all media. 3 Slide the paper guides to match the media size you want to load. (Supported media sizes per paper input option on page 395) IMPORTANT Slide the guides until they click into place. This prevents a paper jam, poor print quality and dirty machine parts. 4 Place the media stack against the right side of the paper tray. (Supported media types per paper input option on page 393) IMPORTANT Make sure the loaded the media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ). 5 Gently close the paper tray and make sure it clicks into place. CAUTION When you close the paper tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal in‐ jury. After you finish • When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality, turn over the media stack and reload the media stack. Do not reload textured, single-sided coated, or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam. For these media, take a new stack. • Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. 92 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load media into the paper module Load media into the paper module Each of the three paper trays of the optional paper module can hold up to 2,000 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond). The paper trays feed the media face up. (Paper module on page 29) [51] Location of the paper module NOTE • When you change from plain paper to coated paper, the print system fans the media first. • Check that the height of the loaded media stack is maximum 20 mm / 0.8" to avoid curled and creased edges. IMPORTANT • When you lift the inside lifter in the paper tray, for example, because you dropped something, do not lift the lifter more than 50 mm / 2" or diagonally. This can cause a malfunction or machine damage. • Do not hit the right-hand paper guide when you load paper. This can cause a malfunction or machine damage. • Never place media or other objects in the empty parts of the paper tray. This can cause a paper jam. • Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load the media correctly a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 93 Load media into the paper module Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414) (Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) (Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 90) (Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 88) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) Procedure Action 1 Press the button (1) to open the paper tray (2). 2 Lift the feeding support roller and remove all media. When the media size does not change, continue with step 9, otherwise go to step 3. 3 Slide the right-hand paper guide to the righthand side of the paper tray. 4 Squeeze the lever and slide the paper guides so that there is enough space to load the media. 5 Fold down the right-hand paper guide, when the media size is more than 457 mm / 18". 4 94 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load media into the paper module Action 6 Load a media stack of approximately 10 mm / 0.4". (Supported media types per paper input option on page 393, Supported envelope types per paper input option on page 396) 7 Squeeze the lever and slide the paper guides against the media stack and check the size mark for the exact alignment. (Supported media sizes per paper input option on page 395) 8 Slide the right-hand paper guide towards the media stack. 9 Continue to load the next media stacks of approximately 10 mm / 0.4" (1) and lower the feeding support roller (2) when ready. IMPORTANT • Make sure the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ). • Make sure the loaded envelope stack does not exceed the envelope loading limit mark ( ). Load a maximum of approximately 30 envelopes. Use the correct orientation for the envelopes. (Feed instruction for envelopes on page 406) 10 Gently close the paper tray and make sure it clicks into place. CAUTION When you close the paper tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal in‐ jury. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 95 Load media into the paper module After you finish • When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality, turn over the media stack and reload the media stack. Do not reload textured, single-sided coated, or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam. For these media, take a new stack. • Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. 96 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load media into the bulk paper module Load media into the bulk paper module The optional bulk paper module can hold up to 3,500 sheets of paper (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond). The paper tray feeds the media face up. (Bulk paper module on page 30) When you load envelopes in the bulk paper module, you need the envelope guide (Envelope Feeder Attachment-G1). (Supported envelope types per paper input option on page 396) [52] Location of the bulk paper module IMPORTANT • When you lift the inside lifter in the paper tray, for example, because you dropped something, do not lift the lifter more than 50 mm / 2" or diagonally. This can cause a malfunction or machine damage. • Do not hit the right-hand paper guide when you load the media. This can cause a malfunction or machine damage. • Never place paper or other objects in the empty parts of the paper tray. This can cause a paper jam. • Do not insert paper clips or other objects into the paper blower port on the bulk paper module. • Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load the media correctly, a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 97 Load media into the bulk paper module Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414) (Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) (Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 90) (Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 88) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) Procedure Action 1 Press the button (1) to open the bulk paper tray (2). When the media size does not change continue with step 5, otherwise go to step 2. 2 Slide the right-hand paper guide to the righthand side of the paper tray. 3 Lift the feeding support roller and remove all media. 4 Squeeze the lever and slide the paper guides so that there is enough space to load the media. (Supported media sizes per paper input option on page 395) 4 98 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load media into the bulk paper module Action 5 Load a media stack of approximately 10 mm / 4". (Supported media types per paper input option on page 393, Supported envelope types per paper input option on page 396) IMPORTANT For media sizes larger than A4, first close and then open the paper tray. The inside lifter needs to raise to correctly load media larger than A4. 6 Squeeze the front-side paper guide and slide the paper guides towards, and against, the media stack. 7 Slide the right-hand paper guide to the media stack and check the size mark for the exact alignment. IMPORTANT When you do not align the righthand paper guide properly, a paper jam, poor print quality, or dirty machine parts can occur. 8 Continue to load the next media stacks of approximately 10 mm / 0.4". IMPORTANT • Load approximately 550 sheets of media at a time. If the paper tray can handle more media, the lifter will rise. • Make sure the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ). • When you load envelopes, make sure the loaded envelope stack does not exceed the envelope loading limit mark ( / ). Use the correct orientation for the envelopes. (Feed instruction for envelopes on page 406) imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 4 - Media handling 99 Load media into the bulk paper module Action 9 Gently close the paper tray and make sure it clicks into place. CAUTION When you close the bulk paper mod‐ ule, be careful not to get your fin‐ gers caught. This can cause personal injury. After you finish • When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality, turn over the media stack and reload the media stack. Do not reload textured, single-sided coated, or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam. For these media, take a new stack. • Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. 100 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load media into the special feeder Load media into the special feeder The special feeder can hold up to 100 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond), approximately 10 mm / 4" high. The special feeder feeds the media face up. (Special feeder on page 33) IMPORTANT • Do not load different sizes or types of media at the same time. • It is very important that you use the correct job settings for media such as heavy paper or transparencies. The fixing unit can become dirty, which may require a service visit. Moreover, the image quality can become poor. • Feed vellum media one sheet at a time, and remove each sheet after delivery in the output tray. When you load several sheets together a paper jam can occur. • When you make two-sided prints, printed output can crease depending on the moisture absorption of the media. • When heavy media does not pass through properly, feed the sheets one by one. • When envelopes do not pass through properly, feed the envelopes one by one. • Do not collect more than ten printed envelopes in the output tray. • Envelopes can crease during the print process. • Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load media correctly, a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414) (Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) (Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 90) (Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 88) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. See: Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58 Procedure Action 1 Open the special feeder. 2 Squeeze and slide the paper guides towards the sides of the tray. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 101 Load media into the special feeder Action 3 Pull out the auxiliary tray for large media sizes. 4 Load the media into the special feeder. (Supported media types per paper input option on page 393, Supported envelope types per paper input option on page 396) IMPORTANT • Make sure the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ). • Load a maximum of ten envelopes. Use the correct orientation for the envelopes. (Feed instruction for envelopes on page 406) 5 Align the media precisely between the paper guides. (Supported media sizes per paper input option on page 395) After you finish • When a paper jam occurs or you notice poor image quality, turn over the media stack and reload the media stack. Do not reload textured, single-sided coated, or already printed paper to avoid a paper jam. For these media, take a new stack. • Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. 102 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load long sheets into the special feeder Load long sheets into the special feeder The special feeder can handle only one sheet at a time. The special feeder feeds the media face up. (Special feeder on page 33) IMPORTANT • Load only one sheet at a time. • Do not load envelopes. • It is very important that you use the correct job settings for media such as heavy paper or transparencies. The fixing unit can become dirty, which may require a service visit. Moreover, the image quality can become poor. • Feed vellum media one sheet at a time, and remove each sheet after delivery in the output tray. When you load several sheets together a paper jam can occur. • Check that the alignment guides are attached correctly to avoid paper jams. • When you make two-sided prints, printed output can crease depending on the moisture absorption of the media. • Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load media correctly, a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414) (Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) (Check and prepare transparencies before loading on page 90) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) Procedure Action 1 Loosen the screws (1), adjust all 4 paper guides (2) to the width of the media and tighten the screws again (1). (Supported media sizes per paper input option on page 395) 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 103 Load long sheets into the special feeder Action 2 Load one sheet into the special feeder. (Supported media types per paper input option on page 393) IMPORTANT Make sure the loaded media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ). After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. 104 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load media into the inserter Load media into the inserter The optional inserter can hold up to 200 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) cover sheets or insert sheets. The print system cannot print sheets fed by the inserter. Use the same feed direction in the upper and lower tray. (Inserter on page 31) [53] Location of the inserter IMPORTANT Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load the media correctly, a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414, Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 105 Load media into the inserter Procedure Action 1 Adjust the paper guides to match the media size. (Supported media sizes per paper input option on page 395) When you use the lower tray, first open the lower tray cover. [54] Upper tray [55] Lower tray cover [56] Lower tray 2 Load the paper face up into the inserter. (Supported media types per paper input option on page 393) When you use the lower tray, close the lower tray cover. Use the feed instruction when you use preprinted paper. (Feed direction for the inserter on page 404) IMPORTANT [57] Upper tray Make sure the height of the media stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ). [58] Lower tray After you finish Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. 106 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load envelopes into the internal paper trays Load envelopes into the internal paper trays When you load envelopes into the internal paper tray, use the envelope guide (Envelope Feeder Attachment-F1). (Print module parts on page 27) [59] Location of the internal paper trays IMPORTANT • The maximum height of a stack of envelopes that you can load into the paper tray is approximately 33.5 mm / 1.3" (approximately 50 envelopes). • Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load the media correctly, a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414, Check and prepare envelopes before loading on page 88) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) Procedure Action 1 Grip the handle and pull out the paper tray until it stops. 2 Lift up the envelope guide straight from its holder. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 107 Load envelopes into the internal paper trays Action 3 Attach the envelope guide as shown in the illustration. 4 Load one envelope against the right-hand side of the paper tray. (Supported envelope types per paper input option on page 396) Envelope orientation 1: Nagagata 3, Kakugata 2 Envelope orientation 2: No. 10 (COM10), ISOC5, DL, Monarch, Yougatanaga 3 [60] Envelope orientation 1 [61] Envelope orientation 2 5 Squeeze the top of the front guide and slide the guides towards, and against, the envelope (1 and 2). IMPORTANT Slide the guides until they click into place to prevent a paper jam, poor print quality, or dirty machine parts. 6 Load all envelopes. IMPORTANT • Make sure that the height of the stack does not exceed approximately 33.5 mm / 1.3" (approximately 50 envelopes). • Make sure that the height of the envelope stack does not exceed the envelope loading limit mark ( ). 7 Gently close the paper tray and make sure it clicks into place. CAUTION When you close the paper tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. 8 Return the envelope guide to its holder when the job is ready. After you finish IMPORTANT Make sure you put the envelope guide into its holder to avoid a paper jam. 108 Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Load envelopes into the internal paper trays Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 109 Load tab paper into the internal paper trays Load tab paper into the internal paper trays When you load tab paper into the internal paper tray, you need to use the tab paper guide (Tab Feeding Attachment-F1). (Print module parts on page 27) IMPORTANT • Only use A4 / LTR tab paper. • Never place media or other objects in the empty parts of the paper trays. This can cause a paper jam. • Make sure you follow the instructions carefully. When you do not load the media correctly, a paper jam, dirty machine parts, or poor print quality can occur. CAUTION When you handle paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper. Before you begin • Check and prepare the media. (Paper input specifications on page 414, Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) • Awake the print system from sleep mode, if applicable. (Awake the printer from sleep mode on page 58) Procedure Action 1 Grip the handle and pull out the paper tray until it stops. 2 Lift up the tab paper guide from its holder (1) and fix the tab paper guide with the blue screw (2). (Supported media sizes per paper input option on page 395) 3 Place the tab paper in reverse order in the paper tray. (Feed instruction for tab paper on page 408, Supported media types per paper input option on page 393) IMPORTANT Make sure the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ). 110 Chapter 4 - Media handling 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Load tab paper into the internal paper trays Action 4 Squeeze the top of the front guide and slide the guides towards, and against, the tab paper. 5 Gently close the paper tray until it clicks into place. CAUTION When you close the paper tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal in‐ jury. 6 Return the tab paper guide back to its holder when the job is ready. After you finish IMPORTANT Make sure you put the tab paper guide into its holder to avoid a paper jam. Tightly rewrap the remaining media in the original package, and store the package in a dry place, away from direct sunlight or high temperatures. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 4 - Media handling 111 Load media for the scheduled jobs Load media for the scheduled jobs The schedule displays the required media for the scheduled jobs. You can load and assign media for jobs that are ready for printing via the Trays button on the right-hand side of the control panel or via the schedule. When you load media via the schedule, PRISMAsync automatically assigns the media to the correct paper tray. (Monitor printing with the schedule on page 178) The print system can retrieve media from any paper tray that contains the required media. You can open a paper tray when the print system is busy. The paper tray opens as soon as possible. When the print system uses the paper tray for a job and the media are also available in another paper tray, the print process continues. When there are no other paper trays with the media, the print process stops. (Learn about printer status on page 56) 1 3 5 2 4 [62] The required media for the scheduled jobs Before you begin IMPORTANT Make sure you know how to load the different media types into the paper trays. (Load media on page 91, Media for your output on page 76) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 112 Touch [Schedule]. Select the media you want to load in the [Required media] pane (2). Touch [Load] (3). Select a paper tray to load the media. Open the paper tray and load the media into the paper tray. Close the paper tray. Touch [OK] to confirm. PRISMAsync automatically assigns the media to the correct paper tray. Chapter 4 - Media handling imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 5 Prepare the jobs Prepare print jobs Prepare print jobs Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver Remote Printer Driver enables you to prepare the complete print job. Remote Printer Driver is available in all applications for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. You use Remote Printer Driver to submit documents from applications, such as Microsoft Office and Adobe Acrobat. Be aware that there are also other PRISMAsync locations from where you can define job settings at a later moment. In addition, workflow definitions can overrule settings you have made with Remote Printer Driver. (Choose a workflow profile on page 68) The printer and its finishing equipment determine which settings are available in Remote Printer Driver. Below you find an overview of the functions. The online help of Remote Printer Driver also provides detailed information on the available functions. Download Remote Printer Driver from the Settings Editor. (System configuration and maintenance on page 222) 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 7 9 10 [63] Functions of PRISMAsync Remote Printer Driver 1 114 Function Description Printer configuration Click the icon to see the finishing options of the printer. When the printer is not available for printing, the printer icon turns red. Available media Click the icon to check which media are currently assigned in the paper trays of the printer. Printer has stopped When you see a red exclamation mark in this area the printer has stopped printing. Click on the mark to see why the printer stopped. Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Prepare print jobs with Remote Printer Driver Function Description 2 Job name The job name identifies the job on the PRISMAsync Print Server. 3 Document view This preview displays the layout of the document when using the current settings. 4 Document size The default document size is transferred from the application. 5 Document orientation The default document orientation is transferred from the application. 7 Job settings The job settings refer to the layout, finishing, color / black & white options to change the job. 8 Job destination, workflow, These settings refer to several options: the number of sets, and output delivery settings the use of separator sets, the job location on the control panel, the required output tray. The label option allows for an extra identification field. 9 Job template 10 Submit job to printer imagePRESS C850 Series A template bundles a series of job settings. Click the icon to save the current job settings for later re-use. It is also possible to delete stored templates. With the OK button you submit the document and job ticket to the printer. Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 115 Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare The optional PRISMAprepare software is an effective and efficient application to clean up documents and make them ready for printing. You can preview the results of your settings by page. PRISMAprepare provides the following features: • Basic and advanced imposition functions, to prepare the print document on job and page level. • Create variable data documents. • WYSIWIG feedback view, to show the results of the layout, media and finishing settings. • Access to the media catalog, to select the best media for the job. • Functions to clean scanned documents. • Functions to optimize PDF documents. • Export the media catalog to PRISMAsync Print Server of black & white and color systems. You can send jobs to the following locations on PRISMAsync: a DocBox, the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs. (Job management in the queues on page 147) This generic procedure describes how to prepare and submit a job. The online help of PRISMAprepare contains detailed information on the available functions. [64] The PRISMAprepare interface Procedure 1. Open the document in PRISMAprepare. 2. Add pages or page ranges, if required. 3. Define which pages or page ranges need specific layout. 116 Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare 4. Select media from the media catalog by page or page range. [65] The media catalog in PRISMAprepare 5. Select the required color preset. 6. Define the required finishing and delivery options. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 117 Drag & drop print files on hotfolders Drag & drop print files on hotfolders Use hotfolders to submit multiple print files to the print system. The automated workflow that is linked to the hotfolder determines the print properties. In this way, all print files are printed with the same settings. (Learn about automated workflows on page 49) A hotfolder can be accessed from multiple workstations. [66] Drag & drop print files Before you begin 1. Set up hotfolders. (Configure hotfolders on page 319) 2. Double-click the icon to enter the print settings that are defined for the hotfolder. Procedure 1. Drag & drop print files on the shortcut of your desktop. After you finish When there are several jobs in the hotfolder, the jobs are printed in alphabetical order. PRISMAsync removes the print files from the hotfolder after printing. 118 Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Print a file from a USB drive Print a file from a USB drive You can submit documents that are stored on a USB drive to one of the following locations: • List of waiting jobs • List of scheduled jobs • A DocBox For more information, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and Learn about the document printing workflow on page 46. [67] The USB button Procedure 1. Insert the USB drive into the USB port at the left-hand side of the control panel. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) 2. Touch [Jobs] -> [USB]. 3. Select the document or use one of the selection functions to select multiple documents together. 4. Touch [Print] to submit the document to the list of [Scheduled jobs] or touch [Save] to store the document in one of the other locations. and remove the USB drive. 5. Touch the eject button imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 119 Work with variable data in document printing mode Work with variable data in document printing mode Variable data printing is used for direct marketing, advertising, and personalized letters. PRISMAprepare and document authoring tools allow to build personalized documents. Variable data, for example names and addresses, are merged with fixed elements and saved as multirecord documents. (Prepare print jobs with PRISMAprepare on page 116) NR. NAME 1 Jeff GB 12345 London ADDRESS IMAGE IMG 12 2 Olaf NO 34567 Oslo IMG 34 3 Mieke NL 56789 Amsterdam IMG 56 4 Gina IT 45678 Rome IMG 78 5 Ulli DE 23456 Berlin IMG 90 Olaf [IMG] [NAME] [ADDRESS] NO 34567 Oslo Gina IT 45678 Rome [68] Creation of personalized documents PRISMAsync supports several PPML formats and the PDF/VT format for variable data printing. (Print system specifications on page 412) Also manually created VDP jobs are supported. When PRISMAsync receives a variable data print job, it distinguishes the record structure. Records are treated as print sets. Large jobs can be converted into VDP jobs. (Convert a job to a variable data job on page 156) Submit variable data jobs to PRISMAsync with an automated workflow or PRISMAprepare. (Learn about automated workflows on page 49) [69] Properties of a variable data job The 120 icon indicates a variable data job in the job list. (Print variable data jobs on page 174) Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Prepare copy and scan jobs Prepare copy and scan jobs Copy jobs The copy function enables you to copy paper originals. You can define each individual setting for the copy job or use templates. Templates contain predefined settings for recurring types of copy jobs. (Copy job settings on page 385) The copy function shows a number of factory default templates, for example, to copy mixed-size originals or to combine different sets of originals. Furthermore, you can define or change your own templates. When you select a template, PRISMAsync automatically uses copy and original settings for the job. Minimize the copy/scan job definition view so that you also can perform other tasks on the control panel. You can specify the destination for the copy job. When you want to print the copy job later, select the list of waiting jobs or a DocBox. (Job management in the queues on page 147) Default copy templates [70] Default copy templates The following default copy job templates are available. Template When to use [Copy job] When you have an extensive copy job. [Easy copy job] When you have a simple copy job. [Combined copy job] When you have a copy job with subsets of originals. [Booklet job] When you need copied booklets. imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 121 Copy jobs 122 Template When to use [Mixed size] When you have a copy job with mixed-size originals. The copy will also have these media sizes. [Last used] When you want to reuse the settings of the previous copy job. You cannot use this function for a combined copy job. [Copy to DocBox] When the destination of the copy job is the first available DocBox or DocBox of your choice. Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Scan jobs Scan jobs The scan function enables you to create a digital document from originals. You can define the individual settings for a scan job or use templates. (Scan job settings on page 388) The scan function contains a number of factory default templates, for example, to scan mixedsize originals or to combine different sets of originals. Furthermore, you can define or change your own templates. When you select a template, PRISMAsync automatically uses scan and original settings for the job. Minimize the copy/scan settings view so that you can also do other tasks on the control panel. Scan job templates [71] Scan job templates A scan template includes the destination of the scan file. You can scan to a server, workstation, USB drive or to email. PRISMAsync transfers the scan file to the list of scan files, before it arrives in the required destination. PRISMAsync automatically removes scan files from the list after a preset period, but you can also remove scan files from the list in the Job view. Configure the scan file transfer, the scan file destinations and the removal of scan files in the Settings Editor. (System configuration and maintenance on page 222) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 123 Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan The automatic document feeder feeds and scans a set of originals for copy or scan jobs. It automatically transfers the originals to the scan area. (Automatic document feeder on page 32) IMPORTANT • Thin originals can become creased in high temperatures or high humidities. • When you scan long originals (432 mm - 630 mm / 17" - 24.8"), push back the auxiliary originals tray and feed the originals by hand to prevent creased originals. • Do not place the following originals into the automatic document feeder that are difficult to feed, such as: - Originals with tears or large binding holes - Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds - Clipped or stapled originals - Carbon-backed paper - Transparencies and other highly transparent media • Always smooth out folds in originals before you place them into the automatic document feeder. • Do not drop clips or other objects into the gap of the originals tray. • Do not add or remove originals during the scan process. • Do not place objects in the original output area. This can cause damage to originals. • Do not scan originals more than 30 times. This can cause the originals to become folded and creased. • When the rollers of the automatic document feeder get dirty due to originals written with pencil, perform the automatic document feeder cleaning procedure. (Clean the rollers of the automatic document feeder on page 257) Action 1 Adjust the paper guides to fit the size of your originals. (Paper input specifications on page 414) You can place a set of mixed-size originals into the automatic document feeder. 4 124 Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan Action 2 Place the originals face up into the originals tray; the originals input indicator * illuminates green. The position of the originals influences the staple, fold and punch location. (Feed direction on page 397) * CAUTION Do not insert your hands in the gap of the originals tray. This can cause personal injury. 3 Define the copy or scan settings and touch [Start] . When the original receiving tray detects the scanned originals, the originals output indicator * illuminates white. * 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Remove the scanned originals from the originals receiving tray when the originals output indicator * blinks. Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 125 Use the glass plate to copy or scan Use the glass plate to copy or scan You must use the glass plate to scan a page of a magazine or book, a heavy or delicate document, or a transparency. (Automatic document feeder on page 32) The scan area detects the following original sizes: A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R , 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR, SMT, SMTR. (Paper input specifications on page 414) Action 1 Lift the automatic document feeder approximately 300 mm / 11.8" to allow the sensor to detect the size of the original. * 2 Place and align an original face down. The position of the original influences the staple, fold and punch location in the printed output. (Feed direction on page 397) 3 Gently close the automatic document feeder. CAUTION To prevent damage to the glass plate and personal injury, carefully close the cover and do not push on‐ to the cover. 4 Define the copy or scan settings and touch [Start] . CAUTION Be aware that the light of the glass plate is very bright. 5 126 Remove the original from the glass plate. Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Make a copy Make a copy You start a copy job from the automatic document feeder or the glass plate. When the scan area has scanned the originals, the copy goes to the destination you indicated. (Copy jobs on page 121, Copy subsets (combined copying) on page 131) 1 3 2 4 5 Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate. (Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 124, Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 126) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Place a set of originals into the automatic document feeder or place an original on the glass plate. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. Select a copy template. (Use templates for recurring jobs on page 130) Define the original settings in the [Original] pane (1). (Copy job settings on page 385) Define the output settings in the [Output] pane (2). Enter a job name and the number of sets in the [Job] pane (3). Select the destination of the copy (3). To scan now and print later, select the list of waiting jobs or a DocBox . 8. Check the results of your settings in the preview pane (4). 9. Touch the start button . imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 127 Make a scan Make a scan You can start a scan job from the automatic document feeder or the glass plate. When the scan area has scanned the originals, the scan file goes to the destination you indicated. (Scan jobs on page 123, Scan subsets (combined scanning) on page 132) PRISMAsync automatically defines a number of settings for the originals and the scan file. However, you can overrule these automatic settings. The automatic settings have the prefix "Auto". 1 3 2 4 5 Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate. (Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 124, Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 126) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Place a set of originals into the automatic document feeder or place an original on the glass plate. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. Select a scan template. (Use templates for recurring jobs on page 130) Define the original settings in the [Original] pane (1). (Scan job settings on page 388) Define the output settings in the [Output] pane (2). Select the destination of the scan file in the [Job] pane (3). • For scanning to email, define the subject of the email, the addresses and your account ID. • For scanning to USB, insert the USB drive into the USB port and select the required folder on the drive. • For scan to DocBox and scan to waiting jobs you can define the print job settings. (Print job settings on page 380) 7. Enter a job name and a file name ID (3). 8. Check the results of your settings in the preview pane (4). 128 Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Make a scan 9. Touch the start button . and remove the USB drive, if applicable. 10. Touch the eject button imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 129 Use templates for recurring jobs Use templates for recurring jobs The print system offers a number of default templates. When you carry out copy or scan jobs with the same settings on a regular basis, create custom templates to store the settings for these jobs. (Copy jobs on page 121, Scan jobs on page 123) [72] Store settings of a copy or scan job in a template NOTE • To change a custom template, touch the custom template for two seconds. You can rename, move or delete the custom template. • To store the settings of the last job in a custom template, touch the [Last used] template for two seconds. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 130 Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. Select one of the available job templates. Adjust the template settings. Touch [Save as template]. Enter a name for the custom template and touch [OK]. Touch [Cancel]. Touch [Jobs]->[Copy/Scan] to view the new template. Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Copy subsets (combined copying) Copy subsets (combined copying) You can combine different subsets of originals into a copy. With the optional [Page programming] function you can define the layout and finishing of each subset. (Copy jobs on page 121) Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate. (Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 124, Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 126) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan] -> [Combined copy job]. Place the first subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. Define the settings for the subset and the copy. (Copy job settings on page 385) Touch [Scan]. Place the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. Define the settings for the subset and the copy. Touch [Scan]. Repeat step 5, 6, and 7 for each following subset. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned. Use the optional [Page programming] function to define the layout and finishing of the subsets. (Use page programming on page 162) 11. Touch [Ready] to close the [Page programming] function. 12. Define the destination and enter a name for the copy. 13. Touch the start button to start the copy job. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs 131 Scan subsets (combined scanning) Scan subsets (combined scanning) You can combine different subsets of originals into a scan file. With the optional [Page programming] function you can define the layout and finishing of each subset. (Scan jobs on page 123) Before you begin Read the instructions detailing how to use the automatic document feeder and the glass plate. (Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 124, Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 126) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Touch [Jobs] -> [Copy/Scan]. Select one the available scan templates. Touch [Subset]. Place the first subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. Define the settings for the subset and the scan file. (Scan job settings on page 388) Touch [Scan]. Place the next subset into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate. Define the settings for the subset and the scan file. Touch [Scan]. Repeat steps 7, 8, and 9 for each subset. Touch [Ready] when the last subset is scanned. Use the optional [Page programming] function to define the layout and finishing of the subsets. (Use page programming on page 162) 13. Touch [Ready] to close the [Page programming] function. 14. Define the destination for the scan file, enter the job name and the file name ID for the scan file. 15. Touch the start button to start the scan job. 132 Chapter 5 - Prepare the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 6 Plan the workload remotely Use Remote Manager to plan the workload Use Remote Manager to plan the workload With Remote Manager you are able to plan the workload across the available PRISMAsync print systems. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) Workload planning helps to achieve an optimal print production and an efficient job handling. (Learn about the document printing workflow on page 46) The Remote Manager application needs to be configured on one of the print systems, the socalled Remote Manager host. (Set up workload planning on page 135) Open Remote Manager For this procedure you must have the rights to access remote tools. (Learn about user authentication on page 54) 1. Open the Settings Editor of the Remote Manager host. 2. Click the Remote Manager link in the upper right-hand corner of the window. Remote Manager user interface The Remote Manager user interface consists of a single overview from which you can monitor the status of all connected print systems. For more information, refer to the online help of Remote Manager. 4 1 3 2 [73] Monitor print systems On the left side you see the list of connected print systems and their status (1). To see the filling level of the input trays, click the media icon next to the illustration of the print system. The scheduled jobs of these print systems are listed in a single overview (2). Also the completion time of the scheduled jobs are visible (3). To see the filling levels of the output trays, open the dropdown menu ( ). When the print system needs operator intervention, a message is shown in the time-line (3). You can send ready-to-print documents to a print system with the + button (4). 134 Chapter 6 - Plan the workload remotely imagePRESS C850 Series Set up workload planning Set up workload planning When there are more print systems in your print environment that all use a PRISMAsync Print Server, these print systems can be connected. The web-based Remote Manager application offers a remote interface to plan your workload across the connected print systems. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) Remote Manager provides overviews of print systems, jobs in the queues, current activities and upcoming actions. With Remote Manager operators can see job queues of the connected print systems and are able to change job orders, to move jobs to other systems and to edit and add jobs. So, they plan their daily workload in an efficient and productive way. Remote Manager runs on the PRISMAsync Print Server of one of the print systems. On this PRISMAsync Print Server you define the list of printers that you want to manage with Remote Manager. Remote A Manager B printers C Remote B printers C D D A Remote A printers B C Remote A printers C D B D C Remote A printers B D [74] Printer pool where print system A is the Remote Manager host There is no need to use Remote Manager to make it possible to send jobs from the control panel of one print system to another print system. Therefore you define a list of remote print systems on every PRISMAsync Print Server to which you want to send jobs. However, when also Remote Manager is configured, all jobs of the connected print systems can be rerouted via the central Remote Manager interface. Procedure 1. Decide which print systems must be connected to Remote Manager. 2. Decide which print system will be the Remote Manager host. 3. Open the Settings Editor of the Remote Manager host to configure Remote Manager: 1. Enable Remote Manager. ([Preferences]→[System settings]→[Printing workflows]) 2. Add the print systems to which you want to connect. ([Workflow]→[Remote Manager]) 3. Add users to the user group Central operators. Remote Manager. ([Configuration]→[Users]) 4. Define in the Settings Editor of each print system connected to Remote Manager, including the Remote Manager host, the list of remote print systems. ([Workflow]→[Remote printers]) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 6 - Plan the workload remotely 135 Prepare the jobs remotely Prepare the jobs remotely When Remote Manager is configured, you can submit jobs remotely to all print systems connected to Remote Manager. (Use Remote Manager to plan the workload on page 134) 1 2 3 4 For more information, refer to the online help of Remote Manager. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 136 Start Remote Manager. (Open Remote Manager on page 134) Drag and drop print files to a print system or use the + button to add print files. Select a printer, if required (1). Select an automated workflow, if required (2). Select the destination of the job (3). Define the job settings (4). Click [OK] Chapter 6 - Plan the workload remotely imagePRESS C850 Series Plan and print the jobs remotely Plan and print the jobs remotely Via Remote Manager you can access all jobs that are stored in the connected print systems. (Use Remote Manager to plan the workload on page 134) This enables you to determine the destination of each job or even change the properties of a job from one central point. So, you can change the job order or send jobs to another print system to unburden the workload from a busy or inactive print system. When you send a job to another print system, you make a copy of the job in the list of waiting jobs of the destination print system. The original job remains on the original location. You can delete this job when you do not need this job on the original print system in the future. Below you find an overview of the main workload management tasks. For more information, refer to the online help of Remote Manager. 4 1 2 3 [75] Remote access to print systems and their jobs On the left side you can select a print system (1) to view all jobs on this print system. For all print systems you can access the lists of scheduled jobs (2), waiting jobs (3), printed jobs and the DocBox (4). The toolbars provide proofing, printing, editing and routing options. Furthermore you can export PDF jobs to preflight tooling and import the PDF jobs again. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 6 - Plan the workload remotely 137 Change job properties remotely Change job properties remotely When Remote Manager is configured, you can adjust the job settings remotely. (Use Remote Manager to plan the workload on page 134) 1 2 3 4 [76] Remote Manager to access to print job properties For more information, refer to the online help of Remote Manager. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 138 Start Remote Manager. (Open Remote Manager on page 134) Select the print system that holds the job you want to change. Go to the location of the job. Select the job you want to change. Click [Properties]. Check the job information in (1). Change output settings (3). (Print job settings on page 380) Use the optional [Page programming] function (4), if required. Check the results of the changed settings in the preview pane (2). Click [OK] (4). Chapter 6 - Plan the workload remotely imagePRESS C850 Series Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing The PRISMAsync Remote Control app helps you to stay informed about the print production on the available PRISMAsync printers. Even at a distance. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) With PRISMAsync Remote Control on your smartphone, you see the status of your PRISMAsync driven printers at a glance. You receive alerts when operator actions, such as loading media or adding consumables, are foreseen. Or, in case a problem at the printer asks for an immediate action. PRISMAsync Remote Control helps you to keep your printers printing, even while you're doing other things. Before you begin To use the Remote Control app you need the following: • One of the following smartphones: • Smartphone with Google Android 4.1 or higher • Apple iPhone 4 or later with iOS 7 or higher • A Microsoft or Google account. Set up Remote Control You must set up Remote Control on every print system you want to monitor. You need administrator rights to set up Remote Control. 1. Go to the control panel. 2. Enable and configure the proxy server: Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [System configuration] -> [Proxy server]. 3. Enable and configure the remote connection: Touch [System] -> [Setup] -> [System configuration] -> [Remote connection]. 4. Open the Settings Editor. 5. Go the Remote Connection settings: [Configuration]→[Connectivity]→[Cloud services] 6. Click [Register print system for cloud services] to register this printer for the Remote Control administration. 7. Click [Remote Control] to enable the Remote Control function. 8. Click [Open administration website] to administer the users of the Remote Control app. Set up the Remote Control app 1. Download the PRISMAsync Remote Control app from Google Play . 2. Start the app and log in with your Google or Microsoft account. 3. Change the default settings, if required. imagePRESS C850 Series or the Apple App Store Chapter 6 - Plan the workload remotely 139 Use the Remote Control app to monitor printing 140 Chapter 6 - Plan the workload remotely imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 Plan the jobs Use the DocBox Use the DocBox DocBox The DocBox is short for document box. The optional DocBox storage location on PRISMAsync helps to manage jobs before printing. (Learn about the document printing workflow on page 46, Job management in the queues on page 147) For example, use the DocBox: • As a storage folder for each print operator. • As a secure folder protected with a PIN. • As a storage folder for jobs that need reprinting on a regular basis. • As a storage folder for jobs that need further job editing or page programming. • As a storage folder for jobs that come from a hotfolder or an automated workflow. [77] The DocBox folders You can do the following tasks with a DocBox job: • Lock the job settings. • Move it to another DocBox. • Combine it with another job in the DocBox. • Print it with priority. Configure the DocBox with the Settings Editor. (Configure the DoxBox function on page 311) 142 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Change a DocBox job Change a DocBox job You can change the settings of a DocBox job. (DocBox on page 142) The same job settings are available in the list of waiting jobs. With the optional [Page programming] function you can define the layout and finishing of subsets and page ranges. Use the list button to toggle between the list and the thumbnail view. [78] Job settings in DocBox Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. Select the DocBox folder that contains the job you want to edit. Enter a PIN, if requested. Select the job you want to change Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. Make the required settings. (Print job settings on page 380) Use the optional [Page programming] function, if required. (Use page programming on page 162) 8. Check the results of the changed settings in the preview pane. 9. Touch [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 143 Combine DocBox jobs Combine DocBox jobs You can combine DocBox jobs into one new job. (DocBox on page 142) You change the settings for the combined job in a single property window. The settings available depend on the individual job settings. The icon indicates a combined job. Use the list button to toggle between the list and the thumbnail view. [79] Job combination in DocBox Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. Select the DocBox folder that contains the jobs you want to combine. Enter a PIN, if requested. Select the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 5. Select [Build] from the drop-down menu. The [Create build] window appears. 6. Use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job sequence in the combined job, if required. 7. Touch [OK]. NOTE Split the combined job into the original jobs with the [Split] function. Move a job to an other DocBox folder with the [Move] function. 144 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Lock DocBox job settings Lock DocBox job settings You can lock a DocBox job to protect its settings. (DocBox on page 142) The icon indicates a locked job. 1 3 2 4 5 [80] The lock function in DocBox Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. Select the DocBox folder that contains the job you want to lock. Enter a PIN, if requested. Select one or more jobs that you want to lock, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 5. Select [Lock] from the drop-down menu. NOTE Unlock the job again with the [Unlock] function. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 145 Print DocBox jobs Print DocBox jobs You can print DocBox jobs in several ways: • Without urgency, using the [Print] function. PRISMAsync submits the job to the last position on the list of scheduled jobs. • With urgency (immediately), using the [Print now] function. PRISMAsync submits the job to the first position on the list of scheduled jobs. The active job is put on hold. • First make a proof print. (Proofing on page 167) The printed jobs remain in the DocBox folder. (DocBox on page 142) Make sure you remove printed DocBox jobs on regular base, to prevent a full system disk. 1 3 2 4 5 [81] Selection of jobs in a DocBox Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch [Jobs] -> [DocBox]. Select the DocBox folder that contains the jobs you want to print. Enter a PIN, if requested. Select one or more jobs that you want to print, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 5. Touch [Print], [Print now], or [Proof]. 146 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Manage the jobs in the queue Manage the jobs in the queue Job management in the queues When the document printing mode is active, you can submit jobs to several locations on the PRISMAsync Print Server. The active workflow profile also determines the destination. (Learn about the document printing workflow on page 46, DocBox on page 142) The following locations are available on PRISMAsync: • List of waiting jobs • List of scheduled jobs • DocBox (optional) When the print system is in the transaction printing mode, PRISMAsync routes the streaming jobs directly to the list of scheduled jobs. Waiting jobs When jobs arrive in the list of waiting jobs, you determine the print order of the jobs. You are also able to change print job settings or perform page programming. Using one of the selection functions you can select the jobs and then give the print command. The jobs are added to the list of scheduled jobs. To increase the print productivity, you can use the job bundle function to combine several jobs into a single job. The original jobs are no longer visible, but you can recover the original jobs with the split function. You can change some properties and the print order of the individual jobs in the bundled job. [82] List of waiting jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 147 Job management in the queues Scheduled jobs The print system prints the jobs in the sequence of the list of scheduled jobs. However, you are able to change the print sequence when one or more jobs require priority. In addition, you can decide to postpone or stop a print job. The schedule gives you up to eight hours of plan-ahead predictability into the print production. It tells you everything you need to know to avoid an idle print system. (Monitor printing with the schedule on page 178) [83] List of scheduled jobs Printed jobs When a job is ready, it is visible in the list of printed jobs. You must move the printed job to the list of waiting jobs, before you can reprint the job. Printed jobs remain available after the print system is shut down. Proof prints or stopped jobs are not visible in the list of printed jobs. In the following situations, you are not able to reprint jobs: • The list of printed jobs is disabled in the Settings Editor. • The print system is in the transaction printing mode. • PRISMAsync already removed the print jobs from the list. Removal of printed jobs When you no longer need your printed jobs, you can remove them from the list of printed jobs. PRISMAsync can also remove printed jobs automatically. Automatic removal of a printed job occurs after a preset period has expired. For security reasons, configure the optional E-shredding function in the Settings Editor. E-shredding overwrites the deleted job data and prevents data recovery from a removed job. When the automatic job removal is not active, it is important to prevent a full system disc. Delete print jobs manually from the list of printed jobs and the DocBox folders on a regular base. 148 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Job management in the queues Selection of a series of jobs There are some useful selection functions to select all or some types of jobs in a job list. For example, you can select all jobs in the list of waiting jobs that are ready for printing and use specific media. You can also select jobs with a specific label. You add a label to a job via a setting in Remote Printer Driver, a job ticket, or an automated workflow. 1 3 2 4 5 [84] The selection function in the list of waiting jobs Send jobs to other printers From the control panel of a PRISMAsync printer, you can send jobs to any other printer. The list of remote printers must be enabled and configured in the Settings Editor ([Workflow]→[Remote printers]). PRISMAsync Remote Manager With PRISMAsync Remote Manager you can monitor printers, operate printers remotely, and send jobs and ready-to-print documents to the printer queues of all configured printers. (Use Remote Manager to plan the workload on page 134) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 149 View the jobs in the queues View the jobs in the queues Jobs arrive in the list of waiting jobs or the list of scheduled jobs. The Jobs view displays the list of scheduled jobs and the list of waiting jobs. The active workflow profile influences the destination of the jobs. (Job management in the queues on page 147, Choose a workflow profile on page 68) [85] List of scheduled and waiting jobs Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. Touch to expand the list of [Waiting jobs], if required. Touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs], if required. Tap one or more jobs or use one of the selection functions to select the jobs that meet criteria. For example, you can select jobs that use specific media or have a label. NOTE When you touch a single job in the selection of jobs longer (long touch), the selection is limited to this job. Double tap a job to open the [Properties] window. 150 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Bundle jobs Bundle jobs You can bundle jobs stored in the list of waiting jobs. (Job management in the queues on page 147, Choose a workflow profile on page 68) When you bundle two or more jobs, you create a new job from the individual jobs. The new job goes to the last position of the list of waiting jobs. The individual jobs are no longer part of the list. The bundled job will be given the name of the first individual job in the bundle. When you split a bundled job, the individual jobs appear again and the bundled job is no longer part of the list. The individual jobs go to the last position of the list of waiting jobs. The icon indicates a bundled job. [86] Bundled jobs in the list of waiting jobs Before you begin Check that all individual jobs have the same output location. Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs]. 2. Select the jobs to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 3. Touch [Bundle]. The [Create bundle] window appears. 4. Use the [Up] and [Down] buttons to change the job order in the bundle, if required. 5. Touch [OK]. NOTE Split the combined job into the individual jobs using the [Split] function. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 151 Add extra sheets to a job Add extra sheets to a job You can add extra sheets to print and copy jobs to get more information on your printed jobs. Include banner and trailer pages to see the beginning and end of a job. Use separator sheets to separate the sets in jobs. Print job information is printed on banner and trailer pages, while separator sheets are not printed on. [87] Banner and trailer page [88] Separator sheets With the Settings Editor you can enable the banner and trailer pages function which is applicable to all jobs. (Configure banner pages and trailer pages on page 286) Below you find the procedure to add separator sheets. You add the separator sheets in one of the following locations: • List of waiting jobs • List of scheduled jobs • A DocBox For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147, View the jobs in the queues on page 150. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 152 Touch [Jobs]. Go to the location of the job. Select the job to which you want to add separator sheets. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job. Indicate at the top right corner that you want separator sheets. Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Move a scheduled job to the list of waiting jobs Move a scheduled job to the list of waiting jobs The print system prints jobs that are in the list of scheduled jobs. (Job management in the queues on page 147, View the jobs in the queues on page 150) You can decide to print a scheduled job later, for example: • Because the required media are out of stock. • You want to first check the settings and make a proof. (Proofing on page 167) 1 3 2 4 5 [89] A scheduled job NOTE When you want to move the active job to the list of waiting jobs, you must first press the [Stop] button twice to stop the job. (Stop printing on page 175) Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. Touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs], if required. 3. Select the jobs you want to move, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 4. Touch [Move]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 153 Send a job to another printer Send a job to another printer You can send jobs with their settings to another PRISMAsync printer from the following locations: • List of scheduled jobs • List of waiting jobs • A DocBox • List of printed jobs For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147, View the jobs in the queues on page 150. NOTE The list of remote printers must be available and configured in the Settings Editor. ([Workflow]→ [Remote printers]) With Remote Manager you can send jobs remotely to other printers. (Use Remote Manager to plan the workload on page 134) [90] Copy jobs to other printers Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the jobs. 3. Select the jobs you want to send to another printer, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 4. Select [Copy to] from the button bar or from the drop-down menu. 5. Select a printer from the list or use [Other printer] to manually enter a printer name. 6. Press [OK]. 154 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Remove print jobs Remove print jobs You can delete jobs from the following locations: • List of printed jobs • List of scheduled jobs • List of waiting jobs • A DocBox (DocBox on page 142) For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147, View the jobs in the queues on page 150. IMPORTANT When PRISMAsync does not automatically remove jobs from the list of printed jobs, make sure you remove the printed jobs manually to prevent a full system disc. NOTE • The list of printed jobs must be available. • When enabled, PRISMAsync removes the printed jobs after a preset period. Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the jobs. 3. Select the jobs you want to combine, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs at once. 4. Touch [Delete]. 5. Confirm the deletion action. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 155 Convert a job to a variable data job Convert a job to a variable data job If you print a large document that has the structure of a variable data document, you can instruct the print system to handle this job as a variable data job. This can be useful if you only want a proof print or only want to print part of the job. (Work with variable data in document printing mode on page 120) To indicate how the job is composed, you enter either the number of records or the pages per record. You can also convert jobs to variable data jobs with an automated workflow. (Learn about automated workflows on page 49) [91] Indicate the structure of the job Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch [Jobs]. Go to the location of the job. Select the job you want to convert. Touch [Properties], or double tap the job. Touch [Job type]. Touch [Normal] -> [Variable data]. Define how often the master document occurs in the job at [Number of records] or enter the number of pages in the master document at [Pages per record]. 8. Touch [OK] to store the new job type. 9. Touch [OK] to start the conversion. After you finish After conversion you can make the job settings and print the variable data job. (Print variable data jobs on page 174) 156 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Load and assign media Load and assign media Add temporary media to the media catalog You can print on media that are not part of the media catalog. In Remote Printer Driver and PRISMAprepare you specify that the job uses temporary media and define the temporary media. You can add this temporary media to the media catalog in the System view of the control panel. This is useful if you are using the temporary media more often. (Media for your output on page 76) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Touch [System] -> [Media]. Select one or more temporary media. Touch the drop-down icon ( ). Select [To catalog] from the drop-down menu. Fill out the media attributes. Touch [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs 157 Assign media to a paper tray Assign media to a paper tray You can use the paper tray button at the right-hand side of the control panel to check the media that are loaded in the paper trays. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) You assign media in the Trays view after you loaded the media in the paper tray. As long as the media type in the paper tray does not change, it is not necessary to assign the media after loading. (Media for your output on page 76) [92] Paper trays with and without assigned media NOTE You can also use the [Trays] button. Before you begin Determine which media the jobs need. IMPORTANT Make sure you know how to load media into the paper trays. (Load media on page 91) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Press the paper tray button . Select the paper tray in which you want to load the media. Use the open button of the paper tray or touch [Open] in the Trays view. Load the media into the paper tray. Close the paper tray. Touch [Assign] if the media type in the paper tray has changed. Select the media from the media catalog and touch [OK]. NOTE Only the media that are allowed for the selected paper tray are displayed. 8. Press the paper tray button 158 Chapter 7 - Plan the jobs , to close the Trays view. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 Print the jobs Change a job Change a job Preview job settings The job properties area of PRISMAsync include a preview of the document to print. The preview exactly shows the results of current impositioning and print settings. You immediately see the effect of changing values. (Change job settings on page 161) You preview the settings remotely with PRISMAsync Remote Manager or local on the control panel in one of the following locations: • List of scheduled jobs • List of waiting jobs • A DocBox (Change a DocBox job on page 143) For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. [93] Document view Before you begin 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch [Jobs]. Go to the location of the job. Select the job you want to change. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 160 View the result of the job and imposition settings in the sheet view . icon and browse the document. Touch the View how the document will look after printing in the document view . Use the zoom function to view specific details. Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Change job settings Change job settings Job settings are usually made during the job preparation. You can decide to change the print job settings after you checked the first set of a print job, after a proof, or after you print a job ticket. You change the settings remotely with PRISMAsync Remote Manager or local on the control panel in one of the following locations: • List of scheduled jobs • List of waiting jobs • A DocBox (Change a DocBox job on page 143) For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. The online help of PRISMAsync Remote Manager contains detailed information on how on change the job settings remotely. 3 1 2 4 5 [94] Print job settings Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Touch [Jobs]. Go to the location of the job. Select the job you want to change. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. Check the job information in the [Original] pane (1). Change the settings in the [Output] pane (2). Change the settings in the [Job] pane (3). (Print job settings on page 380) Use the optional [Page programming] function (5), if required. (Use page programming on page 162) 9. Check the results of the changed settings in the preview pane (4). (Preview job settings on page 160) 10. Touch [OK] (5). imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 161 Use page programming Use page programming With the optional page programming function, you can create subsets and page ranges to apply different layout, media and finishing settings within the job. (Print job settings on page 380) The page programming window alerts you when you make settings that do not match already defined job properties. [95] Page Programming When you have copied or scanned with subsets, you can start with these subsets. Use the settings in the [Output] pane for the page ranges and subsets. (Copy subsets (combined copying) on page 131, Scan subsets (combined scanning) on page 132) The following table shows easy-to-use page programming tasks. 162 Task Procedure Split a subset 1. Select a subset. 2. Touch [Split]. 3. Select the first page of the new subset. Add a page to a page range or subset 1. Select the subset or page range. 2. Touch [Insert] to add a page before or after a page range or subset. Delete parts of jobs 1. Select the subset or page range. 2. Touch [Delete] to delete the subset or page range. Select parts of jobs 1. Touch [Select] to select page ranges or subsets according to a criteria, for example, specific media. Combine and split subsets 1. Select the subsets to combine. 2. Touch [Merge] to create the new subset. Use [Split] to get the individual subsets. Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Use page programming Task Procedure Change finishing settings 1. Select the subsets which must apply the same finishing settings. 2. Touch [Merge finishing] and select the subset to use the finishing settings. Use [Split finishing] to get the original finishing settings. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 163 Adjust CMYK curves for a job Adjust CMYK curves for a job Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the calibrated CMYK curves on job level. There are two modes in which you can adjust CMYK curves. The basic mode for a quick and easy adjustment of the CMYK curves. The advanced mode where you can adjust control points throughout the tonal range of an image. Also, in this mode you can preserve colors for example logo colors and use preset CMYK curves. You can adjust the CMYK curves for a job in the following locations: • List of scheduled jobs • List of waiting jobs • A DocBox For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. IMPORTANT • Be aware that achieving a consistent reproduction of colors is difficult when you adjust CMYK curves on job level. • First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (About calibration on page 186) Before you begin 1. 2. 3. 4. 164 Touch [Jobs] and go to the location of the job. Select the job you want to change. Touch [Properties], or double-tap the job to open the [Properties] window. Touch [Adjust image]. The [Basic mode] window opens. Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Adjust CMYK curves for a job Adjust the CMYK curves in basic mode [96] Adjustment in basic mode 1. Touch the slider icon to browse through the thumbnails. 2. Select the thumbnail of the pages you want to adjust. When you selected all pages, touch one thumbnail longer (long touch) to undo the selection. 3. Use the zoom function to check the result of the adjustment in a specific area. When enabled, you can use the pinch gesture to zoom. (Adjust the control panel on page 64) 4. Use your finger to pan the image. 5. Adjust the density values for the four colors. 6. Touch [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 165 Adjust CMYK curves for a job Adjust the CMYK curves in advanced mode [97] Adjustment in advanced mode 166 Task Instruction Preserve colors 1. Touch the dropper icon. 2. Position the target icon with your finger on the color you want to preserve. 3. Touch [Add points]. Apply a CMYK-curve preset 1. 2. 3. 4. Define the color clipping range 1. Touch and drag the lower left-hand wedge . 2. Touch and drag the upper right-hand wedge . Adjust the curves manually 1. Touch the raster icon. 2. Touch the curve to add a control point . To delete a control point, first select a control point. Then, touch the trash icon. 3. Touch the + and - signs to move the control point or drag the control point with your finger. 4. Check the result in the preview. 5. When ready, select a new color. Adjust the contrast of all colors 1. Touch the contrast icon. 2. Use the slider to adjust the contrast. 3. Check the result in the preview. Chapter 8 - Print the jobs Touch the load icon. Select a CMYK-curve preset. Touch [Done]. Check the result in the preview. imagePRESS C850 Series Proofing Proofing Check first set Especially for jobs with many sets, check the first print set before you print all other sets in one run. [98] Check first set setting Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Touch [Jobs]. Go to the location of the job. Select the job you want to print. Touch [Properties] Touch [Number of sets]. Touch [Check first set] If this setting is grayed out, you must change this setting in the workflow profile. (Choose a workflow profile on page 68) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 167 Make a proof Make a proof When you make a proof, the print system prints one set or record of the job. A proof print does not affect the number of sets when you print the complete job. The proof function is available in the following locations: • List of waiting jobs • A DocBox (DocBox on page 142) For more information about job locations, seeJob management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. When you select the [Proof] command, a copy of the job goes to the last position in the list of scheduled jobs. The original job remains in the list of waiting jobs or in the DocBox. You must first move a printed job to the list of waiting jobs before you make a proof. The magnifying glass icon indicates a proof print. [99] The [Proof] button Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the jobs you want to proof, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 4. Touch [Proof]. 168 Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Print a job ticket Print a job ticket You can check job settings with a job ticket print. This print contains the main properties of the print job, such as name, owner, destination, and media. The [Ticket] button is available in the following locations: • List of scheduled jobs • List of waiting jobs • List of printed jobs • A DocBox (DocBox on page 142) For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. When you give the [Ticket] command, the job ticket print goes to the last position in the list of scheduled jobs. You can recognize the job ticket print by the prefix "Properties of" in front of the job name. [100] Print a job ticket Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs]. 2. Go to the location of the job. 3. Select the jobs for the job ticket print, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 4. Touch [Ticket]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 169 Make intermediate check prints Make intermediate check prints Intermediate check prints are sample prints that are made while the job is being printed. The check prints arrive in the output tray that is closest to the print module. Intermediate check prints are printed according to a set interval, which you configure in the Settings Editor. (Configure intermediate check prints on page 291) In addition, you use the intermediate check print function to check a single sheet of the current job. 1 3 2 4 5 [101] Intermediate check print function An intermediate check print is an automatic print sample of a job sheet. The intermediate check print arrives in the output tray that is close to the print module. Enable the intermediate check print setting in the System view of the control panel. In the Settings Editor you can define the number of sheets between two sample sheets. Procedure 1. Touch [System] -> [Setup]. 2. Press [Intermediate check print]. 170 Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Printing Printing Print a waiting job When jobs are in the list of waiting jobs, you can select one or more jobs to print. They will go to the list of scheduled jobs. You can maintain full control of the print order and timing. To check the job, first make a proof print. For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. 1 3 2 4 5 [102] The selection options are in the list of waiting jobs Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. 2. Touch to expand the list of [Waiting jobs], if required. 3. Select the jobs you want to print, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple jobs together. 4. Touch [Print] or [Proof]. (Proofing on page 167) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 171 Print a scheduled job immediately Print a scheduled job immediately You can give a scheduled print job priority over the other print jobs. The [Print now] button allows you to print a job immediately. The print system stops the active print job after a set is finished. To print a scheduled job as soon as possible, but not immediately, use the [To top] function. The job goes to the first position of the list of scheduled jobs. For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. [103] A scheduled job Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 172 Touch [Jobs] -> [Queues]. Touch to expand the list of [Scheduled jobs], if required. Select the job that you want to print immediately. Touch [Print now] or [To top]. Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Reprint a job Reprint a job To reprint jobs that have already been printed, go to the list of printed jobs. From the list of printed jobs you can make a copy of one or more printed jobs. The jobs move to the list of waiting jobs, from where you can print them. For more information about job locations, see Job management in the queues on page 147 and View the jobs in the queues on page 150. 1 3 2 4 5 [104] The list of printed jobs NOTE • The list of printed jobs must be available. • You cannot reprint jobs in transaction printing mode. Procedure 1. Touch [Jobs] -> [Printed jobs]. 2. Select the jobs you want to reprint, or use an option from the [Select] menu to select multiple 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. jobs together. Touch [Copy]. Touch [Queues] -> [Waiting jobs]. Select the jobs you want to reprint. Touch [Properties], if you want to change job settings. Touch [Print]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 173 Print variable data jobs Print variable data jobs When PRISMAsync receives a job with variable data (PDF/VT job), it distinguishes the record structure. (Work with variable data in document printing mode on page 120, Convert a job to a variable data job on page 156) PRISMAsync treats records as print sets with fixed contents. [105] A PDF/VT job in the list of scheduled jobs When the PDF/VT job arrives in the print queue, you can use the following functions: Procedure 1. Change the settings of the job. Be aware that when you change settings of a PDF/VT job, these settings are applicable to all records of the job. Page programming is not available for PDF/VT jobs. 2. Print a proof of the first record or print a range of records. 3. Print a range of records. 4. Interrupt the print process after a certain record, and resume the print process of the job later. 174 Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Stop printing Stop printing When you want to stop or delay the print production, use one of the following functions: • Stop the print process, after the active job set is ready. You can change the job settings for the remaining sets. • Stop the print process as soon as possible, for example, you notice a problem or see printed output that does not meet your expectations. • Stop the print process, after a specific job is ready. You can select this job from the list of scheduled jobs. You can resume the print process later, if required. [106] Stop after a job Procedure 1. Use one of the following options to stop the print process: • Press the [Stop] button once to stop print process after the set is ready. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) The print system stops when the print buffer is empty and has completed a set. • Press the [Stop] button twice to stop print process as soon as possible. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) The print system stops when the print buffer is empty (as soon as possible). • Touch [Stop after job] to stop after the selected job is ready. A horizontal, red and white stop bar in the schedule and the list of scheduled jobs indicates that the stop-after-job function is active. The print system stops when the job before the stop bar is ready. 2. Touch the [Resume] button to resume the print process. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 175 Print in transaction printing mode Print in transaction printing mode When the transaction mode is active, you select a transaction setup that matches your print requirements. Create new transaction setups in the Settings Editor. (Configure the transaction printing on page 355, Learn about the transaction printing workflow on page 47) When the alignment of the variable data is not correct, you adjust the image shift via the control panel or via a transaction printing setup with a preset defined image shift. The image shift is visible on all printed output from all paper trays. Before you begin Make sure the list of scheduled jobs is empty. Print in transaction mode 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode] -> [On]. Touch [Active transaction setup] to select a transaction setup. Load the media into the paper trays, if the tray-to-tray media assignment is active. Touch the + or - buttons to shift the image, if required. Touch [System] -> [Transaction] ->[Transaction online] -> [On] Establish the connection from the host or mainframe to the print system and submit the jobs. Monitor the jobs on the control panel, to make sure that all jobs are printed. Use the system status colors to see when new media must be loaded. Activate a transaction setup during transaction printing IMPORTANT For IPDS only. Make sure the current streaming job does not activate other transaction setups. 1. Press the [Stop] button once. 2. Wait until the printer is put on hold. 176 Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Print in transaction printing mode 3. Touch [Active transaction setup] to select a transaction setup. 4. Touch the [Resume] button to resume the print process. After you finish To switch off the transaction printing mode: 1. Touch [System] -> [Transaction] ->[Transaction online] -> [Off]. 2. Touch [System] -> [Transaction] -> [Transaction printing mode] -> [Off]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 177 Keep the system printing Keep the system printing Monitor printing with the schedule The schedule predicts the total print production and offers a daily up to eight-hour plan board. The schedule provides all information on the scheduled jobs, so you are able to intervene when needed and keep your print system running. The user interface of the schedule shows the following information: • The availability of media for scheduled jobs. • The availability of the output trays of the print system. • Prediction of the time the job will be ready. • Prediction of the time the print system will stop. For more information about monitoring the system status, see Learn about printer status on page 56 and Status indicators on page 390. Not all information of the schedule is applicable for the transaction printing mode. When this mode is active, the schedule only shows information on the current use of the output and input locations, and the used job media. (Learn about the transaction printing workflow on page 47) The information of the schedule in the document printing mode 1 3 5 2 4 [107] The schedule for the document printing mode 1 178 Task Description View the estimated print time The timeline shows the jobs and their estimated print time. The vertical red-white bar indicates when the print system stops. This bar appears when you stop a job, but the stop can also be a behavior of the active workflow profile. Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Monitor printing with the schedule Task Description 2 View the required media The required media pane shows the required media for the jobs. The color of each media bar indicates if and how long these media are available. 3 View the used and free paper trays The system overview shows which paper trays the print system for media you select in the required media pane.. 4 Monitor the status of the output locations The output location bar indicates the filling level of the output trays. A vertical red-white bar indicates when a stack eject of the high capacity stacker is expected. The print system keeps printing during a stack eject. 5 Change the time scale The zoom menu extends or decreases the visibility of number of jobs in the schedule. The information of the schedule in the transaction printing mode 1 5 3 2 4 [108] The schedule for the transaction printing mode Task Description 1 View the streaming job name The timeline shows the name of the streaming job. 2 View the required media The required media pane shows the required media for the streaming job. 3 View the used paper trays The system overview shows which paper trays the print system uses. 4 Monitor the required output locations The output location bar indicates the filling level of the output trays. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 179 Remove printed output from the stacker/stapler Remove printed output from the stacker/stapler The output tray moves downwards during the print process to give space to the growing stack of output. The workflow profile determines to which output trays PRISMAsync printed output is sent. When an output tray has reached its limit, the printed output automatically goes to the next available tray. If all available output trays have reached their stacking limits, the printing process stops. Remove all printed output from the output trays. The output trays move upwards, and print process resumes. (Professional stacker / stapler on page 35, Standard stacker / stapler on page 37) Use the Settings Editor to turn high-volume stacking for the professional stacker / stapler on or off. (Configure printer adjustments on page 275) CAUTION • Do not place your fingers in the stacker stapler when it is in use. This can cause personal injury or stacker / stapler damage. • When you remove paper from the output tray, do not place your hands in the output tray of the stacker/stapler. The output tray can move upwards and your hands may get caught. • Do not place your hands in the part of the output tray near the rollers where stapling takes place. This can cause personal injury. 180 Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Remove printed output from the stacker/stapler IMPORTANT • Do not place objects onto the output trays of the stacker/stapler. This can damage the output trays. • Do not place objects under the paper trays of the stacker/stapler. This can damage the output trays. IMPORTANT For stapling with the professional stacker / stapler: • When the width of the media is small, the stapled sets can have uneven edges. • When stapled sets have coated covers, the staples can dirty the covers of sets on the output tray. • You cannot staple vellums, transparencies, labels, and envelopes. IMPORTANT For booklet making with the professional stacker /stapler: • You cannot make booklets of vellums, transparencies, prepunched paper, tab paper, labels, and envelopes. • When the cover weight is less than 64 g/m² / 17 lb bond, the media can crease when saddlestitched. • When the cover weight is less than 64 g/m² / 17 lb bond, the booklets can get uneven edges when trimmed. • When the media size is small, the booklets edges can become uneven when saddle-stitched. • When the media size is small, the booklets edges can become uneven when trimmed. • When the covers use coated paper or insert sheets, the first page after the cover can stick to the back of the cover. • When the covers use coated paper or insert sheets, toner streaks can appear on the covers. • When the covers use coated paper or insert sheets, cracks can appear around the folds of the cover. IMPORTANT For stapling with the standard stacker / stapler: • Do not use stapling when the paper weight is less than 60 g/m² / 16 lb bond. IMPORTANT For booklet making with the standard stacker / stapler: • Do not make booklets when the media weight is less than 60 g/m² / 16 lb bond. • You cannot saddle-stitch media when the media weight is more than 256 g/m² / 94 lb cover. • You cannot saddle-stitch vellums, transparencies, prepunched paper, tab paper, labels, and envelopes. • You cannot saddle-fold media when the media weight is more than 256 g/m² / 94 lb cover. • You cannot saddle-fold vellums, transparencies, prepunched paper, tab paper, labels, and envelopes. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 181 Remove printed output from the stacker/stapler IMPORTANT For punching with the standard stacker / stapler: • You cannot punch holes when the media weight is more than 256 g/m² / 94 lb cover. • The punch units do not support heavy, coated media (more than 221 g/m²), vellums, transparencies, prepunched paper, labels, and envelopes. NOTE Make sure that the booklet tray of the standard stacker / stapler matches the correct booklet size to avoid paper jams. [109] 305 mm x 457 mm / 12" x 18", A3 / 11" x 17" [110] A4R / LTRR 182 Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Prints storage Prints storage To keep maximum print quality, you must store prints in an optimal storage environment before the transfer to the final destination. Use the following storage recommendations: • Store prints on a flat surface. • Store prints so that the sheets cannot fold or crease. • Use a binder for storage during a long period of time (more than two years). • Do not wrap prints in PVC material. • Do not store prints in a location with high temperatures. • Prints can discolor after a long period of time. • Adhesive can stick prints; only use insoluble adhesive that is completely dry. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 8 - Print the jobs 183 Prints storage 184 Chapter 8 - Print the jobs imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 9 Keep the print quality high About calibration About calibration Calibration is very important to keeping the quality of the color reproduction high. The environment of your print system influences the print quality. A constant temperature and humidity are essential for consistent color output. The print system automatically keeps the print quality as high as possible. However, additional calibration is essential to keep the color reproduction level stable for all media types you use. PRISMAsync offers a structured workflow and feedback mechanism to integrate calibration into your daily work. There are two types of calibrations: the printer calibration and the media family calibration. Printer calibration Printer calibration has two procedures: • Automatic gradation adjustment The automatic gradation adjustment includes precise adjustments of the gradation, density and color quality of the primary colors. • Shading correction The shading correction includes precise adjustments of slightly uneven color densities in color planes. There are two modes available for the automatic gradation adjustment: • Standard This recommended mode guarantees a high print quality for most print environments. • Professional This extended mode is advised when you frequently use heavy and extra heavy uncoated media or when you frequently use coated media. The printer calibration settings on the control panel show which printer calibration procedures are configured for your print system. The dashboard of the control panel will show the printer calibration indicator when printer calibration is required. Configuration of printer calibration If required, consult a color expert to decide what you need to configure for printer calibration to achieve the required color quality: • The standard or professional mode for automatic gradation adjustment. • How often to perform the shading correction. IMPORTANT It is strongly advised to perform the shading correction at least once after the installation of the print system. IMPORTANT It is strongly advised to configure at least the automatic gradation adjustment for daily printer calibration. You can configure the required printer calibration procedures in the Settings Editor. Then, the operator receives a daily reminder to perform the printer calibration. (Configure printer calibration on page 328) Media family calibration PRISMAsync provides default coated and uncoated media families. A media family is a set of media with the same output profiles (one per halftone) and calibration curves. Before you start a media family calibration, always perform the printer calibration. 186 Chapter 9 - Keep the print quality high imagePRESS C850 Series About calibration A media family calibration is necessary for the following situations: • After the installation of the print system, for the default media families coated and uncoated. • Every few weeks to keep the print quality high for frequently used media families. • When a new media family is created. • When your service organization replaces system parts. IMPORTANT It is advised to perform the media family calibration regularly. Media for calibration The printer and media family calibration need media. Media for the printer calibration You can define and see the media for the printer calibration in the Settings Editor. NOTE To find the media for printer calibration in the Settings Editor: [Color] -> [Color calibration]. Normal media for standard and professional printer calibration: • Top Colour Zero FSC (100 g/m² / 27 lb bond) • Canon CS-814 (81.4 g/m² / 22 lb bond) • Mondi Neusiedler (100 g/m² / 27 lb bond) • International Paper Hammermill Color Copy Digital (105 g/m² / 28 lb bond) Heavy media for professional printer calibration: • Top Colour Zero FSC (250 g/m² / 92 lb cover) • Mondi (250 g/m² / 92 lb cover) • Mohawk Navajo Cover 98 bright (243 g/m² / 90 lb cover) Extra heavy media for professional printer calibration: • Top Colour Zero FSC (300 g/m² / 110 lb cover) • Mondi (300 g/m² / 110 lb cover) • International Paper Hammermill Color Copy Digital (271 g/m² / 100 lb cover) When the recommended media is not sufficiently available, you can use custom media for automatic gradation adjustment. (Register the custom media for automatic gradation adjustment on page 205) Media for the media family calibration Make sure you use the same calibration media to represent the media family each time you perform a media family calibration. You can set per media family the default calibration media for media family calibration. Recommended calibration scenario IMPORTANT You are advised to follow the next calibration scenario to keep the image quality high: • Perform the printer calibration daily. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) • Perform the shading correction once. (Perform a shading correction on page 189) • Perform the media family calibration regularly. (Calibrate the media family on page 190) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 9 - Keep the print quality high 187 Calibrate the printer Calibrate the printer It is important that the print system is calibrated daily. The calibration indicator on the dashboard helps to remind you when printer calibration is required. (About calibration on page 186) Printer calibration is required. As part of the procedure the system will print calibration charts. For an automatic measurement of these charts, an internal sensor must be installed in the printer and enabled in the Settings Editor. IMPORTANT You are strongly advised to perform the printer calibration daily. [111] The printer calibration settings Before you begin Media for calibration • Prepare calibration media according to the calibration media specifications. (Media for calibration on page 187) • First, print a job of about 100 sheets to ensure that the printer is warmed up. Procedure 1. Load the calibration media. 2. Touch the calibration indicator on the dashboard or go to [System] -> [Color adjustment]. 3. If required, touch [Printer calibration details] to check which calibration procedures are configured. 4. Touch [Start printer calibration]. 5. Follow the instructions on the control panel. 188 Chapter 9 - Keep the print quality high imagePRESS C850 Series Perform a shading correction Perform a shading correction In most cases, an automatic gradation adjustment is sufficient to deliver the required color quality. You are advised to perform the shading correction at least once. (About calibration on page 186) However, in the following situations it is necessary to perform also the shading correction: • When the printed output shows uneven color densities in the color panes. • After the installation of the print system. • When your service organization replaces system parts. When different supported calibration media are loaded and assigned, the correction procedure will select the media with the largest size, regardless if this media is coated or uncoated. [112] Shading correction Tools i1 spectrophotometer. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Perform a printer calibration. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) Connect the i1 spectrophotometer to the USB port of the control panel. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Printer calibration details]. Select [Shading correction]. Touch [Start printer calibration]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. After you finish When the shading correction produces a "density not within required range" error, perform a correction procedure for this error. (Fix "density not within required range" error on page 377) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 9 - Keep the print quality high 189 Calibrate the media family Calibrate the media family Calibrate a media family in the following situations: • After the installation of the print system, for the default coated and uncoated media families. • When a new media family is created. • When your service organization replaces system parts. • When you want to keep the print quality high for frequently used media families. For more information on calibration, see About calibration on page 186. IMPORTANT • A media family calibration applies to all media of the media family. You only have to perform a media family calibration for one media of the media family. This one media is the media that is defined for calibration. • A warning symbol indicates that a media family is not calibrated. [113] Media family calibration options Tools i1 spectrophotometer. Before you begin Make sure you use the same calibration media to represent the media family each time you perform a media family calibration. You can set per media family the default calibration media for media family calibration. 190 Chapter 9 - Keep the print quality high imagePRESS C850 Series Calibrate the media family Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect the i1 spectrophotometer to the USB port of the control panel. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Calibrate media family]. Select the media family to calibrate. Select the media for calibration, if required. The system displays the default selected media for calibration. 6. Load the calibration media. 7. Touch [OK]. 8. Follow the instructions on the control panel. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 9 - Keep the print quality high 191 Calibrate the media family 192 Chapter 9 - Keep the print quality high imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 Perform color adjustments About color adjustments About color adjustments In most cases, a printer calibration is sufficient to deliver the required color quality. Therefore it is advised to always perform a printer calibration before you perform one of the procedures below. (About calibration on page 186) Perform an automatic color mismatch correction when the print system does not execute the color alignment in the correct way. (Automatic color mismatch correction on page 195) Reduce unwanted white edges between color planes with a trapping preset. (Create a trapping preset on page 196) Perform a manual shading correction when you want to correct the shadings close to the edges of the sheet. (Perform a manual shading correction on page 198) Daily printer calibration and media family calibration result in calibrated CMYK curves. You can perform a manual adjustment of the CMYK curves on job level or on system level. (Adjust CMYK curves for a job on page 164, Adjust CMYK curves for a media family on page 200) Only use the automatic correction color tone (ACCT) function to correct slight color deviations in the color tones when the calibration for maximum print quality does not deliver the required color quality. (Correct the color tones with the ACCT function on page 203, Correct the color tones with the ACCT function on page 203) Custom media for automatic gradation adjustment can be used, for example when the recommended media is not sufficiently available. (Register the custom media for automatic gradation adjustment on page 205) Use spot colors to standardize and predict colors to print unique brand colors for logos or business graphics. (Create a spot color on page 207) Create media families and output profiles for specific media and G7 calibration. (Create media families and output profiles on page 210) 194 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Automatic color mismatch correction Automatic color mismatch correction When the four different colors are not aligned correctly, use the automatic color mismatch correction to improve the alignment. [114] Incorrect alignment of colors NOTE You cannot perform the automatic color mismatch correction when the print system is printing. Before you begin IMPORTANT First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (About calibration on page 186) Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Auto color mismatch correction]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. Close the menu. After you finish If the procedure displays an engine error, contact your service organization. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 195 Create a trapping preset Create a trapping preset When you notice unwanted white edges between color planes, use a trapping preset to correct the connection between the color planes. A trapping preset is a collection of trapping settings for a job or job subset. Use the trapping preset editor to create your own trapping presets. You can select a trapping preset for a print job. (Print job settings on page 380) [115] Printed output without trapping preset (left-hand side) and with trapping preset [116] Trapping preset editor The trapping preset window provides an interface to create trapping presets. The following groups of settings are available: • Trap width: value to specify the overlap for each trap • Trap appearance: options to control the shape of the trap joins • Images: options how to trap images • Trap threshold: values to specify when trapping occurs Be aware that an edge can appear at locations where color planes overlap each other. 196 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Create a trapping preset Before you begin IMPORTANT • First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (About calibration on page 186) • Then, check if an automatic color mismatch correction solves the problem. (Automatic color mismatch correction on page 195) For this procedure you must have the rights to access configuration settings. (Users of the print system on page 14) Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Edit trapping presets]. 3. Select one of the available trapping presets. 4. Define the trapping settings in the [Trap width], [Trap appearance], [Images] and [Trap thresholds] panes. 5. Touch [Save as] to save the settings and enter a name for the preset. 6. Touch [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 197 Perform a manual shading correction Perform a manual shading correction Perform a manual shading correction when you want to correct the uniformity of the color panes in the direction perpendicular to the feed direction or the color panes close to the edges of the sheet. Tools i1 spectrophotometer. Before you begin IMPORTANT • First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (About calibration on page 186) • Then, check if the shading correction delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (Perform a shading correction on page 189) Perform a manual shading correction [117] Manual shading correction options 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. Load the largest size uncoated media you use, for example SRA3. 3. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Manual shading correction]. 4. Touch [Print chart] to print the gradation chart. 198 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Perform a manual shading correction [118] Gradation chart 5. Check each color bar on uneven color densities. 6. Make the corrections on the locations where you see deviations. The locations are indicated per color with a number from -6 to 6. The initial values are displayed between brackets. 7. Repeat step 3 - 6 until each color bar has a uniform color. 8. Touch [OK]. After you finish In the exceptional case where the manual shading correction does not deliver the required color quality, do the following: 1. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Manual shading correction]. 2. Touch [Set all to 0]. 3. Perform an automatic shading correction. (Perform a shading correction on page 189) 4. Continue with the manual shading correction. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 199 Adjust CMYK curves for a media family Adjust CMYK curves for a media family Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the color density for specific media. You can emphasize colors or other elements for images printed on media that belong to a media family. The adjustment of the CMYK curves applies to all jobs that use media of the media family. The new CMYK curves are added to the media family calibration values. There are two modes in which you can adjust CMYK curves. The basic mode for a quick and easy adjustment of the CMYK curves. The advanced mode where you can adjust control points throughout the tonal range of an image. Also, in this mode you can preserve colors for example logo colors and use preset CMYK curves. Before you begin IMPORTANT • First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (About calibration on page 186) • Be aware that the CMYK adjustments affect all media of the media family. For this procedure you must have the rights to access configuration settings. (Users of the print system on page 14) 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. 3. 4. 5. 200 Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Edit CMYK curves]. Select the media family. Select the halftone. Touch [Edit]. The [Basic mode] window opens. Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Adjust CMYK curves for a media family Adjust the CMYK curves in basic mode [119] Adjustments in basic mode 1. Adjust the density values for the four colors. 2. Use the zoom function to check the result of the adjustment in a specific area. When enabled, you can use the pinch gesture to zoom. (Adjust the control panel on page 64) 3. Use your finger to pan the image. 4. Touch [OK]. 5. Repeat this procedure for other halftones, if required. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 201 Adjust CMYK curves for a media family Adjust the CMYK curves in advanced mode [120] Adjustments in advanced mode Task Instruction Preserve colors 1. Touch the dropper icon. 2. Position the target icon with your finger on the color you want to preserve. 3. Touch [Add points]. Apply a CMYK-curve preset 1. 2. 3. 4. Define the color clipping range 1. Touch and drag the lower left-hand wedge . 2. Touch and drag the upper right-hand wedge . Adjust the curves manually 1. Touch the raster icon. 2. Touch the curve to add a control point . To delete a control point, first select a control point. Then, touch the trash icon. 3. Touch the + and - signs to move the control point or drag the control point with your finger. 4. Check the result in the preview. 5. When ready, select a new color. Adjust the contrast of all colors 1. Touch the contrast icon. 2. Use the slider to adjust the contrast. 3. Check the result in the preview. Touch the load icon. Select a CMYK-curve preset. Touch [Done]. Check the result in the preview. You can perform the above tasks also for other halftones. 202 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Correct the color tones with the ACCT function Correct the color tones with the ACCT function To correct slight color deviations in the color tones you can activate the automatic correction color tone (ACCT) function. The ACCT function uses the values of the color tones that are stored during the registration procedure. (Register the color tones for the ACCT function on page 73) [121] The status and options of the automatic correction color tone function Before you begin IMPORTANT First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (About calibration on page 186) Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment]. Touch [Auto Correct Color Tone] -> [Activate Auto Correct Color Tone]. Select the slot with the values of the previously registered color tones. Press [OK]. Select the media. Press [OK]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. Close the menu. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 203 Correct the color tones with the ACCT function After you finish When the ACCT function is no longer required, for example when worn parts are replaced, you can deactivate the ACCT function with the [Reset] button. 204 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Register the custom media for automatic gradation adjustment Register the custom media for automatic gradation adjustment Normally, you use the recommended media for the automatic gradation adjustment for an optimal print quality. (About calibration on page 186) When the recommended media is not sufficiently available, you can use custom media for automatic gradation adjustment. Automatic gradation adjustment uses an internal sensor to register the custom media. IMPORTANT For an optimal print quality on custom media, you are advised to register the custom media you use mostly. To register custom media you also need some sheets of the recommended calibration media. At the end of the registration procedure you can decide if you want to use the registered custom media for automatic gradation adjustment. [122] The storage place for custom media on the left-side Before you begin • Make sure the print system has no print quality artifacts when you execute this registration procedure. • Prepare approximately 20 sheets of the recommended calibration media. These sheets are used as reference media during the procedure. (Media for calibration on page 187) • Prepare approximately 20 sheets of the custom media. (Check and prepare media before loading on page 86) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 205 Register the custom media for automatic gradation adjustment Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Register custom media for AGA]. Select a storage place to store the custom media. Touch [OK]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. Indicate if you want to apply the custom media for the automatic gradation adjustment. Close the menu. After you finish You can find the media for standard automatic gradation adjustment in the Settings Editor. Go to: [Color] -> [Color calibration]. 206 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Create a spot color Create a spot color Spot colors are used to define colors, so that output colors always match a specific color value. Spot colors allow the printing of unique brand colors for logos or business graphics. The Settings Editor has functions to import spot color libraries, define color mappings, create and edit spot colors, and print patch charts. (Configure spot colors and spot color libraries on page 345) On the control panel you can define spot colors, measure spot colors, and print patch charts to check and adjust the spot colors. New spot colors are stored in the custom spot color library. Before you begin IMPORTANT First, check whether the printer calibration delivers the required color quality before you perform this procedure. (About calibration on page 186) Define a spot color The definition of your spot colors is usually done through Lab values. You can enter CMYK values, for example when you need saturated colors. [123] Spot color definition with color indicator on the control panel 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Spot colors]. Touch [Add]. Enter the spot color name. In [Input mode], select [CIELAB]. Enter the Lab values. Touch [OK]. Touch [All libraries] -> [Custom library] to easily find the new spot color. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 207 Create a spot color Measure a spot color With the spot color measurement procedure, you measure three locations of a sample of the spot color. The system calculates and returns the average Lab value and reports a ∆E. The reported ∆E value is the largest (delta-E 2000) difference between each individual measured value and the average of all measured values. A ∆E larger than 3 indicates that a large deviation is measured. In that case you are advised to measure the spot color again. An i1 spectrophotometer is required for the measurement of a spot color. [124] Spot color measurement is done via CIELAB values 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Spot colors]. Touch [Add]. At [Input mode], select [CIELAB] . Touch [Start]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. IMPORTANT If ∆E is larger than 3, you are advised to measure the spot color again. 6. Touch [OK]. 7. Touch [All libraries] -> [Custom library] to easily find the new spot color. Check and adjust the spot color How a spot color looks exactly after printing depends on the used media and printer. When a spot color does not fit in the color gamut of the printer (More PRISMAsync color information on page 410), you can print a patch chart to check the spot color and adjust the CMYK values. This allows you to get the most optimal result. 208 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Create a spot color 5 4 3 3 5 2 1 1 3 5 3 4 3 3 [125] Patch chart with spot colors and their CMYK values 1 Patch of selected spot color, printed twice in the centre frame. 2 CMYK value of the centered patches in the centre frame. 3 CMYK values of the surrounded patches (36x). 4 CMYK values of the centered patches in the upper and lower frame. 5 Black values, used to print the centered and surrounding patches. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Spot colors]. Touch [All libraries] -> [Custom library] to easily find your spot colors. Select a spot color. Touch [Edit]. Touch [Add] to add a CMYK definition. Select a media family. Select a media. Touch [Start]. Take the patch chart and check the defined spot color in the middle frame: 1. If the spot color is correct (1), touch [OK]. 2. If another spot color is correct, enter the corresponding CMYK values of this spot color (3) and touch [OK]. 3. If no spot color is correct, increase the step size of the black value (5) and go to step 8. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 209 Create media families and output profiles Create media families and output profiles Create a media family When you use a specific media that differs significantly from the media in the available media families, the print system may not deliver the required color quality. Then, you need to create a new media family followed by a media family calibration with the specific media to improve the color quality for this media. (Media Families on page 45, Media family calibration on page 186) Procedure 1. Create a media family in the Settings Editor. (Configure the media families on page 326) 2. Add the specific media to the new media family in the Settings Editor. (Configure the media on page 324) 3. Calibrate the new media family. (Calibrate the media family on page 190) After you finish If the new media family still does not deliver the required color quality, you can create new output profiles. (Create output profiles with the embedded profiler on page 211) 210 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Create output profiles with the embedded profiler Create output profiles with the embedded profiler Output profiles determine how the system will print color. PRISMAsync uses media families to indicate which output profiles will be used to reproduce color on these media. (Media Families on page 45, Media family calibration on page 186) When the default output profiles do not achieve your color reproduction standards on specific media, you can create new output profiles. The creation of new output profiles can be done during the media family calibration. The embedded color profiler creates and installs an output profile and calibration curve for every halftone. As part of the procedure, you measure the calibration charts printed on the specific media. [126] Indicate media family calibration options and output profile creation Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. Perform a shading correction. (Perform a shading correction on page 189) 3. Touch [System] -> [Media] -> [New]. 4. Fill out the general media attributes. NOTE For optimal print quality, you must define the correct values for the following media attributes: • Size • Weight • Surface type 5. Select [Create new media family]. 6. Touch [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 211 Create output profiles with the embedded profiler 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Select [Calibrate media family]. Select [Include output profile creation]. Load at least 12 sheets of the media for which you create the media family. Touch [OK]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. Close the menu. After you finish You can find the new media family with output profiles in the Settings Editor. Go to [Media] -> [Media families]. 212 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Create G7 calibration curves with an external tool Create G7 calibration curves with an external tool PRISMAsync supports the use of calibration curves created by an external tool, for example CHROMiX Curve3 ™. PRISMAsync uses media families to indicate which output profiles and calibration curves must be applied to a medium. Hence, the creation of a new media family with the factory default G7 output profiles is part of this procedure. PRISMAsync has regular media families and G7 media families. (Media Families on page 45, Media family calibration on page 186) Before you begin • Enable G7 support in the Settings Editor. (Configure printer calibration on page 328) • A file with a chart intended for G7 calibration, for example the P2P25 or P2P51 calibration chart. Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. Create a G7 media family in the Settings Editor (Configure the media families on page 326): 1. Open the Settings Editor. 2. Create a new G7 media family. 3. Create a new media for the G7 media family. 3. Print the G7 measurement chart via an automated workflow: 1. Create a new automated workflow. (Configure automated workflows on page 312) 2. Select the media on which the measurement chart will be printed. 3. At [Measurement chart printing] select [G7 calibration] to print without color management. 4. Print the G7 measurement chart via the G7 automated workflow. 4. Measure the calibration chart: 1. Measure the chart, for example with an X-Rite ™ device. 2. Calculate the calibration curves with the external tool. 5. Import the calculated G7 calibration curves to the G7 media family in the Settings Editor. After you finish You can only disable G7 support in the Settings Editor when all G7 media families are removed. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments 213 Create G7 output profiles with the embedded profiler Create G7 output profiles with the embedded profiler The creation of G7 output profiles and calibration curves with PRISMAsync is very easy and quick. PRISMAsync uses media families to indicate which output profiles and calibration curves must be applied to a media. Hence, the creation of a new media family with new output profiles and calibration curves are part of this procedure. PRISMAsync has regular media families and G7 media families. (Media Families on page 45, Media family calibration on page 186) [127] The G7 calibration options Before you begin Enable G7 support in the Settings Editor. Go to [Color] -> [Color calibration]. Procedure 1. Calibrate the printer. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) IMPORTANT You must always perform a printer calibration before you continue with this procedure. 2. Touch [Create new media family] when you add new media to the media catalog. (Add media to the media catalog on page 84) 3. Touch [G7] and [Calibrate and profile after creation] when you create the new media family. 4. Load the calibration media. 5. Touch [OK]. 6. Follow the instructions on the control panel. 7. Close the menu. After you finish You can find the new G7 media family with output profile on the Settings Editor. Go to: [Media] -> [Media families] 214 Chapter 10 - Perform color adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 11 Perform media adjustments About media adjustments About media adjustments The print quality of the printed output depends on the media used. When you add media to the media catalog, you can define attributes that influence the print behavior of the print system for these media types. (Media for your output on page 76) When you notice that the media or image quality of the printed output is not according to your expectations, perform a correction procedure to adjust the media registration or image quality. (Problem Solving on page 374) The correction procedures change the media attributes in the media catalog, so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use the same media. (Correct curled output media on page 217, Adjust the media registration on page 218) 216 Chapter 11 - Perform media adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Correct curled output media Correct curled output media Media can arrive curled in the output tray. This is caused by temperature differences during the print process. You can perform a correction procedure to prevent curled sheets in the output trays. The results of the correction are immediately effective for jobs that use these media. For media that need a curl correction on the length and width, create two different entrances in the media catalog. The correction procedure changes the media attributes of the media in the media catalog, so that the adjustments are applied to all jobs that use these media. Procedure 1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. NOTE You can also find the curl correction procedure at the Trays view and at the media setting of the job properties. 2. Select the media from the media catalog. 3. Touch [Optimize] -> [Curl correction]. 4. Define the correction factor with the + and - buttons. Start with small increments to avoid paper jams. 5. Touch [OK]. Result You find the correction values in the system adjustment settings on the Preferences tab of the Settings Editor. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 11 - Perform media adjustments 217 Adjust the media registration Adjust the media registration The print system positions the front and back images precisely on both sides of the sheet during the print process. Although the media registration of the print system will mostly meet your expectations, you are able to adjust the media registration values when you notice deviations. There are registration procedures for the following situations: Situation Procedure You want an optimal media registration. Automatic registration This procedure prints registration charts that the system can measure via the scanner. Registration values are automatically calculated and applied. You notice skew deviations. Correction of skew This procedure prints registration charts which you must measure to correct skew deviations. Registration values are automatically calculated and applied. You notice incorrect image positions, reduced or enlarged images. Correction of shift / zoom This procedure prints registration charts which you must measure to correct shift and zoom deviations. Registration values are automatically calculated and applied. You want to adjust the media registration manually. Manual registration This expert function has settings to manually change values of the image sheet registration. [128] The media registration procedures Required tools • Scanner of the printer 218 Chapter 11 - Perform media adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Adjust the media registration • Ruler • Measuring loupe Procedure 1. Touch [System] -> [Media]. NOTE You can also find the media registration procedures at the Trays view and at the media setting of the job properties. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the media from the media catalog. Touch [Optimize] -> [Registration]. Select the required correction procedure. Follow the instructions of the wizard. Close the menu. Result The media registration procedure changes the media attributes of the media in the media catalog. The adjustments are applied to all jobs that use these media. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 11 - Perform media adjustments 219 Adjust the media registration 220 Chapter 11 - Perform media adjustments imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 Maintain the printer System configuration and maintenance System configuration and maintenance Your organization and print environment can ask for a system configuration that meets production and workflow requirements. In addition, authorization, security and sustainability guidelines are important when you establish a print system. The installation of the print system includes most configuration tasks, such as definitions of preferences, job workflows and print languages. The media and color quality requirements are translated into the correct system settings. Changing the settings at a later time depends upon the type of print, copy or scan job. Configuration tasks for the system administrator and key operator The configuration settings are available via a web-based configuration tool, the Settings Editor. Both the key operator and the system administrator can change settings in the Settings Editor. A part of the Settings Editor settings and information is also available on the System view and Start view of the control panel. You need rights to access configuration settings to change these settings. (Users of the print system on page 14) [129] The system configuration settings on the control panel Maintenance tasks for operators Operators are responsible for refilling the consumables, the removal of staple and punch waste, and manual cleaning tasks. (Refill toner and staples on page 224, Remove staple and punch waste on page 246 and Cleaning tasks and procedures on page 251) Maintenance tasks for maintenance operators Maintenance operators can perform procedures to clean machine parts or improve the image quality. Furthermore, they are responsible for mechanical maintenance tasks and maintenance 222 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series System configuration and maintenance procedures via the control panel. (Cleaning tasks and procedures on page 251, Maintain print system parts on page 263) For some procedures you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks to prevent unauthorized use. (Learn about interaction screens on page 50) [130] Maintenance tasks on the control panel Billing counters The Maintenance view shows the following counters that give insights into your system productivity. • Billing counters Billing counters display the total number of images the print system has produced after installation. • Day counters Day counters display the total number of images the print system has produced since the last reset to null. Reset the day counters at the beginning of the day or before you start a series of jobs, for example, for a specific customer. There are counters for normal media (length equal or less than 364 mm / 14.3") and large media (length more than 364 mm / 14.3"). You can read counters, reset day counters, or print the billing counters report in the [System] -> [Maintenance] view. Your service organization can enable the visibility of toner cartridge counters. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 223 Refill toner and staples Refill toner and staples Consumables The following consumables are available from Canon. For more information, contact your local, authorized Canon dealer. We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out. Recommended paper In addition to plain paper (A3 / 11" x 17" and A4 / LTR size), recycled paper, color paper, transparencies (recommended for this machine), labels, and other types of paper stock are available. CAUTION Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire. IMPORTANT Some commercially available paper types are not suited to this printer. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer when you need to purchase paper. To prevent moisture buildup, tightly wrap remaining paper in its original package for storage. NOTE For high-quality prints, use paper recommended by Canon. Toner If a message asking you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the touch panel display, replace the used toner cartridge with a new one. Toner comes in four colors: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. Check the toner color that you need to replace before ordering toner from your local authorized Canon dealer. Also, when replacing the toner cartridge, make sure that you replace toner of the correct color. Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine. For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner is recommended. 224 Product name Supported Canon genuine toner imagePRESS C850 Series Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Black Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Cyan Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Magenta Canon imagePRESS Toner T01 Yellow Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Consumables *1 *2 *1 black toner cartridge *2 cyan, magenta, or yellow toner cartridge WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire. Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire. If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully wipe up the loose toner with a damp, soft cloth and avoid inhaling any toner dust. Do not use a vacuum cleaner that is not equipped with safety measures to prevent dust explosions to clean up loose toner. Doing so may cause damage to the vacuum cleaner or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge. CAUTION Keep toner out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately. IMPORTANT Store toner cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. (The recommended storage conditions are temperatures below 30°C and humidity below 80%.) Be careful of counterfeit toners Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner. For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit. Waste toner container Use only waste toner containers intended for use with this machine. Do not replace the waste toner container before the message prompting you to replace it appears on the touch panel display. Product name Supported Canon genuine waste toner container imagePRESS C850 Series WT-401 imagePRESS C850 Series Shape Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 225 Consumables Staple cartridge in the staple unit Finisher Staple cartridge Name Staple Finisher-W1 PRO Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO Staple-N1 Staple Finisher-T1 Booklet Finisher-T1 Staple-J1 Shape Staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit Finisher Staple cartridge Name Staple Finisher-W1 PRO Staple-P1 Booklet Finisher-T1 Staple Cartridge-D2 (3 cartridges per box) Staple Cartridge-D3 (2 cartridges per box) Shape Genuine supplies Canon has developed and manufactured toner, parts, and supplies specifically for use in this machine. 226 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Consumables For optimal print quality and for optimal machine performance and productivity, we recommend that you use Genuine Canon toner, parts, and supplies. Contact your Canon Authorized Dealer or Service Provider for Genuine Canon Supplies. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 227 Check the filling level of the toner cartridge Check the filling level of the toner cartridge The dashboard at the top of the control panel and the operation attention light warns you when a toner cartridge needs replacing. (Monitor printing with the schedule on page 178, Learn about printer status on page 56) The color of the icon indicates the status of a toner cartridge. (Replace a toner cartridge on page 229) Toner cartridge contains sufficient toner. Toner cartridge has less than 25% toner. Toner cartridge is empty. Procedure 1. Touch the indicator or go to [System] -> [Printer]. 2. Check the filling levels in the [Supplies] pane. 228 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Replace a toner cartridge Replace a toner cartridge The dashboard of the control panel indicates if a toner cartridge needs replacing. (Check the filling level of the toner cartridge on page 228, Learn about printer status on page 56) Toner cartridges come in four colors: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. You find the toner cartridges in the print module. (Print module parts on page 27) When a toner cartridge becomes empty during a print job, the print process resumes after you replace the toner cartridge. [131] Location of the toner cartridges WARNING • Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames. This can cause toner ignition, which may result in burns or a fire. • Do not store toner cartridges in places that are exposed to open flames. This can cause toner ignition, which may result in burns or a fire. • If toner gets onto your hands or clothing, immediately wash it off with cold water. Warm water will set the toner. If this happens, it will become impossible to remove the toner stains. CAUTION • Keep toner out of the reach of small children. • If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately. IMPORTANT • For information on the Canon genuine toner, see Consumables on page 224. • Be careful with counterfeit toners. Be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toners in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner can result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner. For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit. • Do not replace toner cartridges until a message appears informing you that you must replace a toner cartridge. • You can replace a toner cartridge while the print system is busy. • The color of the toner cartridge that needs to be replaced is displayed on the control panel. If multiple toner cartridges need to be replaced, replace the toner cartridges in the following order: black, yellow, magenta, cyan. • Wait to replace color toner cartridges when you want to continue copying or printing in black & white. Replace the color cartridge after the jobs are ready. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 229 Replace a toner cartridge • When a color cartridge becomes empty, the print system interrupts the job and you cannot continue to copy or print in color and black & white. However, you can cancel the interrupted job and continue to copy or print in black & white. • Never touch the tip of the toner cartridge or hit and shake the cartridge. This can cause a toner cartridge leak. • Store toner cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. The recommended storage conditions are temperatures below 30°C and humidity below 80%. Procedure Action 1 Hold both sides of the toner compartment cover and open it. 2 Go to the control panel and touch [System] -> [Printer]. 3 Select and touch one of the open buttons the toner cartridge you want to replace. 4 Wait for the internal cover to open automatically. in the [Supplies] pane to open the cover of IMPORTANT Do not open the internal cover by force. This can cause machine damage. 5 Pull out the empty toner cartridge. WARNING Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames. This can cause toner ignition in the cartridge which may result in burns or a fire. 6 Unpack the new toner cartridge. IMPORTANT Check that the color of the toner cartridge matches the label color on the internal cover. 4 230 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Replace a toner cartridge Action 7 Gently tilt the new toner cartridge up and down 10 times. 8 Unscrew the red protective cap. 9 Insert the new toner cartridge as far as possible. 10 Close the internal cover. CAUTION When you close the internal cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal in‐ jury. 11 Close the toner replacement cover. CAUTION When you close the toner replace‐ ment cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. After you finish After you replace a color cartridge, a color difference in the output may occur. If this happens, perform the Auto gradation adjustment. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 231 Check the filling level of the waste toner container Check the filling level of the waste toner container The dashboard at the top of the control panel and the operation attention light warn you when the waste toner container is full. (Monitor printing with the schedule on page 178, Learn about printer status on page 56) The color of the icon indicates the status of the waste toner container. (Replace the waste toner container on page 233) Waste toner container has sufficient space. Waste toner container is almost full. Waste toner container is full Procedure 1. Touch the indicator or go to [System] -> [Printer]. 2. Check the filling level in the [Supplies] pane. 232 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Replace the waste toner container Replace the waste toner container The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the waste toner container needs replacing. (Check the filling level of the waste toner container on page 232, Learn about printer status on page 56) You can replace the waste toner container at a later moment, but be aware that the active job or one of the next jobs will cause an error because of the full waste toner container. You can find the waste toner container in the print module. (Print module parts on page 27) [132] Location of the waste toner container WARNING • Do not store toner cartridges in places that are exposed to open flames. This can cause toner ignition, which may result in burns or a fire. • If toner gets onto your hands or clothing, immediately wash it off with cold water. Warm water will set the toner. If this happens, it becomes impossible to remove the toner. CAUTION • If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately. IMPORTANT For information on the Canon waste toner containers, see Consumables on page 224. Your local authorized Canon dealer will dispose of used waste toner containers. You cannot reuse toner. Do not mix new and used toner together. Only use waste toner containers intended for your print system. Do not replace the waste toner container before a message on the control panel appears to inform you that you must replace the container. • When you insert the waste toner container, push the container as far as possible. • • • • • NOTE When you replace the waste toner container during a print job, the print process will resume after the waste toner container is replaced. Procedure Action 1 Open the front left cover of the print module. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 233 Replace the waste toner container Action 2 Go to the control panel and touch [System] -> [Printer]. 3 Touch the open button container. 4 Pull out the tray until it stops. 5 Unscrew the attached cap (1) and close the waste toner container with this cap (2). 6 Remove the waste toner container. in the [Supplies] pane to open the cover of the waste toner CAUTION Do not tilt the waste toner container when you remove it. This causes to‐ ner to be spilled onto your hands or clothing. 7 Place the new waste toner container (1) and return the tray to its original position (2). IMPORTANT Do not close the top hole of the container with the cap before you return the tray to its original position. This can cause a malfunction or machine damage. 8 Close the front left-hand cover of the print module. CAUTION When you close the front left-hand cover of the print module, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. 234 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Check the filling level of the staple cartridge Check the filling level of the staple cartridge The dashboard at the top of the control panel and the operation attention light warn you when a staple cartridges becomes empty. (Monitor printing with the schedule on page 178, Learn about printer status on page 56) The color of the icon indicates the status of a staple cartridge. Staple cartridges contains sufficient staples. At least one staple cartridge is almost empty At least one staple cartridge is empty. For more information, see: Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit on page 236 Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit on page 238 Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit on page 241 Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit on page 244 Procedure 1. Touch the indicator or go to [System] -> [Printer]. 2. Check the filling level in the [Finishers] pane. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 235 Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple cartridge needs replacing. (Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 235, Learn about printer status on page 56) You find the staple unit in the stacker / stapler. (Professional stacker / stapler on page 35) [133] Location of the staple unit IMPORTANT • For information on the Canon genuine staple cartridges, see Consumables on page 224. • Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine. When you perform a maintenance task, such as replace a staple cartridge, remove waste, or solve jams, other machine parts can continue with job process activities. • Remove the seal that holds the staples together after you place the staple cartridge into the staple case. NOTE • We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out. • Only use staple cartridges intended for your print system. [134] Staple-N1 for Staple Finisher-W1 PRO and Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO Procedure Action 1 Open the front cover of the stacker/stapler. 4 236 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Action 2 Hold the green tab of the staple case and pull it out. NOTE When the staple unit is at the back, it is difficult to pull out the staple case. If this happens, turn the dial on the bottom left-hand side to the left to move the staple unit. 3 Take out the empty staple cartridge (1) and insert a new staple cartridge (2). 4 Remove the seal that holds the staples together. 5 Gently push the staple case into the staple unit as far as possible. 6 Close the front cover of the stacker/stapler. CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 237 Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple cartridges need replacing. (Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 235, Learn about printer status on page 56) You find the saddle-stitch unit in the stacker / stapler. (Professional stacker / stapler on page 35) [135] Location of the saddle-stitch unit IMPORTANT • For information on the Canon genuine staple cartridges, see Consumables on page 224. • Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine. When you perform a maintenance task, such as replace a staple cartridge, remove waste, or solve jams, other machine parts can continue with job process activities. • Remove the printed output from the booklet tray before you replace the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit. NOTE • We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out. • When a staple cartridge is empty, replace both cartridges. • Only use staple cartridges intended for your print system. [136] Staple-P1 for Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO Before you begin Remove printed output from the booklet tray. 238 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit Procedure Action 1 Open the front cover of the stacker/stapler. 2 Pull out the saddle-stitch unit (1) and hold the green tab of the staple case to pull out the staple case (2). 3 Squeeze the light blue areas (1) to lift the staple case cover (2). 4 Squeeze (1) to release and lift the empty staple cartridge (2). 5 Insert the new staple cartridge until it clicks into place. 6 Place the staple case cover back in its original position. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 239 Replace in the professional stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit Action 7 Return the staple case back into the saddlestitch unit and check that the two arrows are aligned. 8 Repeat step 2 - 7 for the other staple cartridge. 9 Gently push the saddle-stitch unit back into the stacker/stapler (1) as far as possible. Close the front cover (2). CAUTION • When you push the saddle-stitch unit to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. • When you close the front cover of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. 240 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple cartridge needs replacing. (Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 235, Learn about printer status on page 56) You find the staple unit in the stacker / stapler. (Standard stacker / stapler on page 37) [137] Location of the staple unit IMPORTANT • For information on the Canon genuine staple cartridges, see Consumables on page 224. • Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine. When you perform a maintenance task, such as replace a staple cartridge, remove waste, or solve jams, other machine parts can continue with job process activities. • Remove the seal that holds the staples together after you place the staple cartridge into the staple case. NOTE • We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out. • Only use staple cartridges intended for your print system. [138] Staple-J1 for Staple Finisher-T1 and Booklet Finisher-T1 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 241 Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Procedure Action 1 Open the front cover of the stacker/stapler. [139] Booklet Finisher-T1 [140] Staple Finisher-T1 2 Hold the green tab of the staple case and pull it out. 3 Push on both sides of the staple case (1) and release the staple case (2). 1 PUS H 2 1 4 Insert and fix a new staple cartridge (1) and push the staple cartridge to click it into its place (2). 5 Remove the seal that holds the staples together. IMPORTANT Make sure you pull the seal straight out to avoid tearing. 242 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 2 1 3 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the staple unit Action 6 Gently push the staple case into the staple unit and push down firmly into its place. 7 Close the front cover of the stacker/stapler. The stapler unit may staple to reposition the staples. CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 243 Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple cartridges need replacing. (Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 235, Learn about printer status on page 56) You find the saddle-stitch unit in the stacker / stapler. (Standard stacker / stapler on page 37) [141] Location of the saddle-stitch unit IMPORTANT • For information on the Canon genuine staple cartridges, see Consumables on page 224. • Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine. When you perform a maintenance task, such as replace a staple cartridge, remove waste, or solve jams, other machine parts can continue with job process activities. • Remove the printed output from the booklet tray before you replace the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit. NOTE • We recommend ordering staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out. • When a staple cartridge is empty, replace both cartridges. • Only use staple cartridges intended for your print system. [142] Staple Cartridge-D2 / Staple Cartridge-D3 for Booklet Finisher-T1 Before you begin Remove printed output from the booklet tray. 244 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Replace in the standard stacker / stapler the staple cartridge in the saddle-stitch unit Procedure Action 1 Open the front cover of the stacker/stapler. 2 Pull out the saddle-stitch unit until it stops (1). Pull out and push up the staple unit (2). *2 *1 *1 Saddle-stitch unit *2 Staple unit 3 Remove the empty staple cartridges (1) and click the new staple cartridges into its place (2). NOTE Replace both staple cartridges. You can only insert one staple cartridge at a time. 4 Pull the staple unit towards you and push down the staple unit in its original position (1). Push the saddle-stitch unit in its original position (2). CAUTION When you push the saddle-stitch unit to its original position, be care‐ ful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. 5 Close the front cover. CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 245 Remove staple and punch waste Remove staple and punch waste Remove the staple waste The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the staple waste tray is full. (Check the filling level of the staple cartridge on page 235, Learn about printer status on page 56) You find the staple waste tray in the stacker / stapler. (Standard stacker / stapler on page 37) [143] Location of the staple waste tray Procedure Action 1 Open the front cover of the stacker/stapler. 2 Pull out the staple waste tray at the bottom of the front side of the staple unit. 3 Discard the staple waste. CAUTION When you discard the staple waste, be careful not to touch it. This can cause personal injury. 4 Push the staple waste tray back to its original position, or as far as possible. 4 246 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Remove the staple waste Action 5 Close the front cover of the stacker/stapler. CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 247 Remove in the professional stacker /stapler the punch waste Remove in the professional stacker /stapler the punch waste The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the punch waste tray is full. (Learn about printer status on page 56) The print system cannot punch when the punch waste tray is full. This instruction only describes the removal of punch waste of the stacker/stapler. (Professional stacker / stapler on page 35) Refer to the user manual of the professional puncher how to remove punch waste from the professional puncher. [144] Location of the punch waste tray IMPORTANT Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine. When you perform a maintenance task, such as replace a staple cartridge, remove waste, or solve jams, other machine parts can continue with job process activities. Procedure Action 1 Open the front cover of the stacker/stapler. 2 Check that the guide (F-A2) is closed. When the guide is open, you cannot pull out the punch waste tray. If applicable, close the guide. 3 Pull out the punch waste tray. 4 248 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Remove in the professional stacker /stapler the punch waste Action 4 Discard the punch waste. IMPORTANT Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied. 5 Push the punch waste tray back to its original position, or as far as possible. 6 Close the front cover of the stacker/stapler. CAUTION When you close the front cover of the stacker/stapler, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 249 Remove in the standard stacker / stapler the punch waste Remove in the standard stacker / stapler the punch waste The dashboard of the control panel indicates if the punch waste tray is full. (Learn about printer status on page 56) The print system cannot punch when the punch waste tray is full. This instruction only describes the removal of punch waste of the stacker/stapler. (Standard stacker / stapler on page 37) Refer to the user manual of the professional puncher how to remove punch waste from the professional puncher. [145] Location of the punch waste tray IMPORTANT Be careful when you perform maintenance tasks on optionals attached to the machine. When you perform a maintenance task, such as replace a staple cartridge, remove waste, or solve jams, other machine parts can continue with job process activities. Procedure Action 1 Open the front cover of the punch unit (1) and pull out the punch waste tray (2). 2 Discard the punch waste. IMPORTANT Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied. 3 Return the punch waste tray back to its original position (1) and close the front cover of the punch unit (2). CAUTION When you close the front cover of the punch unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. 250 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Clean print system parts Clean print system parts Cleaning tasks and procedures To keep your print system in optimal condition and prevent poor image quality, clean the following system parts monthly: • Glass plate • Scanning area of the automatic document feeder • Scanning sensors (via the control panel) • Automatic document feeder rollers (via the control panel) • The inside of the print module (via the control panel) • Corona assembly wires (via the control panel) • Main unit roller (via the control panel) • Fixing pressure belt (via the control panel) • Fixing belt (via the control panel) You are advised to clean the control panel weekly. The control panel enables access to the wires, rollers and drums. For some procedures you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks. (Users of the print system on page 14) WARNING • When you clean the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock. • Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire. IMPORTANT • Do not dampen the cloth with too much water. This can damage prints or machine parts. • Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean machine parts. This can damage plastic machine parts. The following procedures are described in this chapter: • Clean the control panel on page 252 • Clean the glass plate area on page 253 • Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area on page 254 • Clean the scanning sensors on page 256 • Clean the rollers of the automatic document feeder on page 257 • Clean the inside of the print module on page 258 • Clean the corona assembly wires on page 259 • Clean the clean roller on page 260 • Clean the fixing pressure belt on page 261 • Refresh the fixing belt on page 262 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 251 Clean the control panel Clean the control panel When the screen of the control panel becomes dirty, you can simply clean the panel with water or a mild cleaning agent. [146] Location of the control panel WARNING • When you clean the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock. • Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire. IMPORTANT • Do not dampen the cloth with too much water. This can damage prints or machine parts. • Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean machine parts. This can damage plastic machine parts. Procedure Action 252 1 Moisten the cloth with water or a mild cleaning agent and wring the cloth out thoroughly. 2 Clean the display of the control panel. 3 Wipe dry with a soft, dry cloth. Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Clean the glass plate area Clean the glass plate area Clean the automatic document feeder and the glass plate in order that the scanner can scan the originals correctly and can detect the size of the originals. You can use water or water mixed with a mild cleaning agent to clean. Use the cleaning cloth provided. When the cleaning cloth becomes dirty, wash and rinse it, and then leave to dry. [147] Location of the glass plate WARNING • When you clean the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock. • Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire. IMPORTANT • Do not dampen the cloth with too much water. This can damage prints or machine parts. • Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean machine parts. This can damage plastic machine parts. Procedure Action 1 Moisten the cloth with water or a mild cleaning agent and wring it out thoroughly. 2 Clean the glass plate (1) and the underside of the automatic document feeder (2) with the cloth. 3 Wipe dry with a soft, dry cloth. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 253 Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area Clean the automatic document feeder and the glass plate in order that the scanner can scan the originals correctly and can detect the size of the originals. You can use water or water with a mild cleaning agent to clean this. Use the cleaning cloth provided. When the cleaning cloth becomes dirty, wash and rinse it, and then leave to dry. [148] Location of the automatic document feeder WARNING • When you clean the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps can result in a fire or electrical shock. • Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This can cause a short circuit and may result in a fire. IMPORTANT • Do not dampen the cloth with too much water. This can damage prints or machine parts. • Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning. This can damage plastic machine parts. Procedure Action 1 Moisten a cloth with water or a mild cleaning agent and wring it out thoroughly. 2 Open the automatic document feeder (1) and clean the original scan area (2) with the cloth. Then, wipe dry with a clean, dry cloth. 3 Pull the lever at the underside of the automatic document feeder (1) to open the document scan cover and open the inside cover (2). IMPORTANT Open the document scan cover carefully to prevent scratches on the glass plate. 254 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Clean the automatic document feeder scanning area Action 4 Clean the thin glass strip of the scan area. Then, wipe dry with a clean, dry cloth. 5 Close the inside cover (1), the document scan cover (2) and the automatic document feeder (3). CAUTION • When you close the covers and the automatic document feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught. This can cause personal injury. • Be aware that the light emitted from the glass plate can be very bright when you close the auto‐ matic document feeder. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 255 Clean the scanning sensors Clean the scanning sensors If streaks appear on the printed output or you cannot scan originals properly, clean the scanner sensors. Before you begin For this procedure you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks. (Users of the print system on page 14) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 256 Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Clean the scanner sensors]. Follow the wizard steps. Close the menu. Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Clean the rollers of the automatic document feeder Clean the rollers of the automatic document feeder If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after they have been through the automatic document feeder, clean the automatic document feeder rollers. It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the rollers of the automatic document feeder. Before you begin • Make sure the list of scheduled jobs is empty. • Make sure you have clean A4 / LTR plain paper (60 - 80 g/m² / 16 lb bond - 20 lb bond). Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Clean the rollers of the document feeder]. Follow the wizard steps. Close the menu. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 257 Clean the inside of the print module Clean the inside of the print module If streaks appear on the printed output or parts of the printed image are missing, clean the inside of the print module. The control panel displays how long it takes to clean the inside of the print module. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 258 Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Clean the inside of the print module]. Follow the wizard steps. Close the menu. Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Clean the corona assembly wires Clean the corona assembly wires If streaks appear on the printed output or parts of the printed image are missing, clean the corona assembly wires inside the print module. It takes approximately 35 seconds to clean the wires. IMPORTANT • Do not turn off the printer during cleaning. • Do not open the front covers during cleaning. • Do not clean during printing. Before you begin Make sure the list of scheduled jobs is empty. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Clean the corona wires]. Follow the wizard steps. Close the menu. After you finish NOTE If the procedure displays an engine error, contact your service organization. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 259 Clean the clean roller Clean the clean roller If streaks appear on the printed output, clean the roller of the print module. The procedure takes approximately one minute. IMPORTANT Do not clean during printing. Before you begin Make sure the list of scheduled jobs is empty. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 260 Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Clean the clean roller (print module)]. Follow the wizard steps. Close the menu. Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Clean the fixing pressure belt Clean the fixing pressure belt If dirt appears on printed output or if the print system indicates that cleaning is required, perform the procedure below to clean the fixing belt. Cleaning is required. Before you begin • Make sure the list of scheduled jobs is empty. • Prepare the media of the largest size you frequently use. • Load at least three sheets of this media in the upper internal paper tray. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Clean the fixing pressure belt] Follow the wizard steps. Close the menu. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 261 Refresh the fixing belt Refresh the fixing belt After the print system has printed more than 100 sheets of a specific paper size, for example A4 / LTR, and then prints on a larger paper size, for example A3 / 11" x 17", luster streaks (ghost printing) can appear on both sides of the paper. Refresh the fixing roller to correct this problem. You can also perform this procedure when you use heavy or coated paper and patches of uneven gloss appear in the high density printed areas. 1 2 A4 A3 [149] The feed direction of paper path (1) and luster streaks (2) IMPORTANT Only perform this procedure in urgent situations, because this procedure can largely decrease the lifetime of the fixing roller. Before you begin • Make sure the list of scheduled jobs is empty. • For this procedure you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks. (Users of the print system on page 14) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Refresh the fixing belt]. Follow the wizard steps. Close the menu. After you finish IMPORTANT If the procedure fails or if you do not get the required result, contact your service organization. 262 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Maintain print system parts Maintain print system parts Lubricate a die set You need to lubricate a die set of the professional puncher when indicated on the control panel. Perform the procedure below to lubricate a die set. Lubrication is required soon. Before you begin • User manual of the professional puncher. • For this procedure you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks. (Users of the print system on page 14) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Lubricate the die set in the professional puncher]. Refer to the user manual of the professional puncher how to lubricate die sets. Close the wizard. IMPORTANT Confirm only if you actually lubricated the die set. A counter keeps track of when lubrication is required. This procedure resets this counter. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer 263 Perform operator maintenance tasks in the print module Perform operator maintenance tasks in the print module Parts must be replaced when indicated on the control panel. To increase the uptime of the print system, the operator can replace the indicated parts himself. IMPORTANT Only trained operators are allowed to perform maintenance tasks in the print module. Your service organization must prepare the system to allow maintenance in the print module. Contact your service organization for more information. The dashboard indicates when maintenance is required with an icon. Maintenance is required soon. Maintenance is required now. Before you begin For this procedure you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks. (Users of the print system on page 14) Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch [System] -> [Maintenance]. Touch [Go to maintenance tasks]. Touch [Print module maintenance]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. IMPORTANT Be aware that this procedure resets the counters that indicate when maintenance is required. 5. Close the menu. After you finish After you replaced a part you must perform a printer calibration. (Calibrate the printer on page 188) 264 Chapter 12 - Maintain the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 Configure the printer Default printer settings Default printer settings Configure the accessibility [150] Accessibility settings When you want to Solution Go to the accessibility settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]→[Accessibility]. Enable the use of the mouse to operate the control panel 1. Go to [Mouse usage] . 2. Enable the use of the mouse. 3. Click [OK]. Adjust the delay time of a button press 1. Go to [Delay time for control panel buttons]. 2. Define the time after which a button press takes action. 3. Click [OK]. Enable a beep sound during toggling 1. Go to [Beep sound]. 2. Enable the beep sound. 3. Click [OK]. 266 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode [151] Energy save modes and wake-up timers When you want to Solution Go to the energy save modes 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]→[Energy save modes]. Enable the sleep mode 1. Go to [Sleep mode timer enabled]. 2. Enable the sleep mode. 3. Click [OK]. Set the sleep mode timer 1. Go to [Sleep mode timer]. 2. Set the time after which the printer enters the sleep mode. 4 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 267 Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode When you want to Solution Enable the low power mode 1. Go to [Low power mode timer enabled]. 2. Enable the low power mode. 3. Click [OK]. Set the low power mode timer 1. Go to [Low-power mode timer]. 2. Set the time after which the printer enters the low power mode. 3. Click [OK]. Set the energy level during sleep mode 1. Go to [Energy level during sleep mode]. 2. Indicate the energy level. The printer leaves the sleep mode faster at a higher energy level. 3. Click [OK]. Set the energy level during low power mode 1. Go to [Energy level during low power mode]. 2. Indicate the energy level. The printer leaves the low power mode faster at a higher energy level. 3. Click [OK]. Automatically awake for a new job 1. Go to [Wake up when new jobs arrive]. 2. Indicate that printer leaves the low power or sleep mode for a new job. 3. Click [OK]. 268 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode When you want to Solution Enable automatic awaking 1. 2. 3. 4. Go to [Energy save modes]. Ensure the sleep mode or low power mode is enabled. Go to [Automatic wake-up enabled]. Enable the automatic awaking from sleep or low power mode. 5. Click [OK]. 6. Go to [Wake-up timers]. 7. Indicate for each day if an automatic awaking occurs. 8. Click [OK]. 9. Define the wake-up time per day. 4 10. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 269 Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode When you want to Solution Enable automatic shut down 1. 2. 3. 4. Go to [Energy save modes]. Ensure the sleep mode or low power mode is enabled. Go to [Automatic shutdown enabled]. Enable the automatic shut down. 5. Click [OK]. 6. Go to [Wake-up timers]. 7. Indicate for each day if an automatic shut down occurs. 8. Click [OK]. 9. Define the shut-down time per day. 10. Click [OK]. Set the sleep mode timer of the Perfect Binder 1. Go to [Perfect binder sleep mode timer]. 2. Set the time after which the Perfect Binder enters the sleep mode. 3. Click [OK]. 270 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure sleep mode, low power mode, and shut-down mode When you want to Solution Let the Perfect Binder leave 1. Go to [Perfect binder leaves sleep mode when print system the sleep mode when the does]. printer does 2. Indicate that the Perfect Binder leaves the sleep mode when the printer does. 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 271 Configure time settings Configure time settings [152] Regional settings and system of measurement settings When you want to Solution Go to the time settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]→[Regional settings]. Change the time zone and time 1. Go to [Time zone]. 2. Change the time zone. The date and time are adjusted accordingly. 3. Click [OK]. 4. If required, adjust the [Date and time] setting. Use an NTP server 1. Go to [NTP client enabled]. 2. Enable NTP. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Go to [NTP server name]. 5. Enter the NTP server name. 6. Click [OK]. 272 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure time settings When you want to Solution Test the connection to the NTP server 1. Go to [Test NTP server connection]. 2. Test the connection with the NTP server. 3. Click [OK]. Change the region in which 1. Go to [Region]. you are 2. Click [USA] to work with US media formats. Click [Rest of the World] to work with ISO (European) media formats. 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 273 Configure system of measurement Configure system of measurement [153] Regional settings and system of measurement settings When you want to Solution Go to the system of measurement settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]→[Regional settings]. Change the system of measurement 1. Go to [System of measurement]. 2. Select [Metric] to work with g/m2 and mm. Select [Imperial] to work with lb and inch. 3. Click [OK]. Change the media weight notation 1. Go to [Media weight notation]. 2. Select the media weight notation you require. 3. Click [OK]. 274 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure printer adjustments Configure printer adjustments Be aware that the printer adjustment settings affect all print jobs. When you want to Solution Go to the printer adjustment settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System adjustments]. Finisher adjustments [154] Finisher adjustment settings When you want to Solution Enable offset stacking in the stack tray 1. Go to [Stack tray - Offset stacking]. 2. Define the offset stacking value. 3. Click [OK]. Define the minimum filling level of the stackers 1. Go to [Minimum filling level]. 2. Define the level. 4 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 275 Configure printer adjustments When you want to Solution Define the maximum stack height of the stackers 1. Go to [Maximum stack height]. 2. Define the height. 3. Click [OK]. Productivity or correct staple position for jobs with two staples 1. Go to [Priority mode for jobs with two staples]. 2. Select the priority. 3. Click [OK]. Adjust the trimming size of the Perfect Binder 1. Go to [Fine adjustment of the Perfect Binding finishing size (horizontal)]. 2. Adjust the horizontal size. 3. Go to [Fine adjustment of the Perfect Binding finishing size (vertical)]. 4. Adjust the vertical size. 5. Click [OK]. Adjust the alignment guides for stapling 1. Go to [Adjustment of the alignment guides for stapling]. 2. Define the width. 3. Click [OK]. 276 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure printer adjustments When you want to Solution Adjust the alignment of the 1. Go to [Adjustment of the alignment of the stacker/stapler upstacker / stapler trays per tray]. 2. Adjust the alignment for the upper tray. 3. Go to [Adjustment of the alignment of the stacker/stapler lower tray]. 4. Adjust the alignment for the lower tray. 5. Click [OK]. Productivity or sheet alignment for jobs with thin paper 1. Go to [Priority mode for jobs with thin paper]. 2. Select the priority. 3. Click [OK]. Productivity or sheet alignment for saddle-stitched jobs with few pages 1. Go to [Priority mode for saddle-stitched jobs with few pages]. 2. Select the priority. 3. Click [OK]. Enable high-volume stacking for the stacker / stapler 1. Go to [High-volume mode enabled]. 2. Select the priority. 4 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 277 Configure printer adjustments When you want to Solution Define how the professional puncher may be used The professional puncher usage can be defined by the system administrator. 1. Go to [Professional puncher usage]. 2. Define the usage. 3. Click [OK]. Print quality adjustments [155] Settings for print quality adjustments When you want to Solution Adjust when and how long the fixing belt needs to be refreshed 1. Go to [Fixing belt auto refresh level]. 2. Adjust the default level. 3. Click [OK]. 278 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure printer adjustments When you want to Solution Remove a color cast that occurs on a white background 1. Go to the settings: [Color cast correction: Cyan] [Color cast correction: Magenta] [Color cast correction: Yellow] [Color cast correction: Black] 2. Adjust the default correction level. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Perform a printer and media family calibration. (About calibration on page 186) Remove white gaps between areas 1. Go to [White gap correction]. 2. Adjust the default level. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Perform an automatic gradation adjustment. (About calibration on page 186) Increase print quality for jobs on heavy paper but with loss of print speed 1. Enable the setting [Low temperature environment mode]. 2. Click [OK]. Remove uneven gloss 1. Go to [Uneven gloss correction]. 2. Decrease the level to reduce the uneven gloss. 4 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 279 Configure printer adjustments When you want to Solution Remove partial distortions or thin white lines due in an environment with high temperature or high humidity 1. Go to [Adjust drum temperature]. 2. Increase the drum temperature. 3. Click [OK]. Smoothen jagged outlines 1. Go to [Special smoothing]. 2. Enable the setting. 3. Click [OK]. Increase productivity for jobs with heavy media but with loss of print quality 1. Go to [Productivity or quality priority for heavy paper]. 2. Select the required setting. 3. Click [OK]. Increase productivity for jobs with coated media but with loss of print quality 1. Go to [Coated paper productivity or gloss quality priority]. 2. Select the required setting. 3. Click [OK]. Increase print quality for 1. Go to [Productivity or image quality priority for mixed paper jobs with mixed-size media types]. but with loss of productivi- 2. Select the required setting. ty 3. Click [OK]. 280 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure printer adjustments When you want to Solution Increase the frequency of the gradation adjustment during printing but with loss of productivity 1. Go to [Gradation adjustment during printing]. 2. Select the required setting. 3. Click [OK]. Scan quality adjustments [156] Settings for scan quality adjustments When you want to Solution Scan documents with extreme thin lines 1. Go to [Streak prevention]. 2. Disable the setting. 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 281 Default job settings Default job settings Configure information bars An information bar contains system and job information and can be selected as job property. It is printed in the trim area of the page: at both sides duplex sheets and the printed sides of simplex sheets. Information bars can help to evaluate the print quality according to the available information. There is one default information bar: FOGRA Validation Print. You can add more custom information bars. [157] Default information bar When you want to Solution Go to the information bar settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color & information bars]. Add an information bar [158] Information bar attributes 1. Click [Add] or select an information bar you want to edit. 2. Click each field you want to use. You can use a maximum of 12 fields. 3. Select for each field the information you want to display. Select [Custom value] for a fixed text which you can enter below the field. 4. Click [OK]. 282 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure information bars When you want to Solution Edit an information bar 1. 2. 3. 4. Delete an information bar 1. Select the information bar. 2. Click [Delete]. imagePRESS C850 Series Select the information bar. Click [Edit]. Adjust the required fields. Click [OK]. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 283 Configure color bars Configure color bars A color bar contains system and job information and can be selected as job property. It is printed in the trim area of the page: at both sides of duplex sheets and at the printed sides of simplex sheets. Color bars can help to verify the color quality and color consistency of print jobs. The color bar uses exact the same color management settings as used for the pages of a job. There are five default color bars: IDEAlliance Control Strip 2009, Fogra CMYK Media Wedge 2008 Version V2.2a Proof, Fogra CMYK Media Wedge 2008 Version V3.0a Proof, Fogra CMYK Media Wedge 2008 Version V3.0b Proof, IDEAlliance Control Wedge 2013. You can import more color bars, if required. [159] Default color bars When you want to Solution Go to the color bar settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color & information bars]. 284 Edit a color bar 1. 2. 3. 4. Import a color bar 1. Click [Import]. 2. Select the .eps file that represents the color bar. 3. Click [OK]. Export a color bar You cannot export factory-defined color bars. 1. Select the color bar. 2. Click [Export]. 3. Click [OK]. Delete a color bar 1. Select the color bar. 2. Click [Delete] Chapter 13 - Configure the printer Select the color bar. Click [Edit]. Change the name and description. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Configure the font of page numbers Configure the font of page numbers Page numbering can be enabled and defined in the job properties. The default font can be set in the Settings Editor. [160] Page numbering settings When you want to Solution Go to the page number set- 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[Print job tings defaults]→[Page numbering]. Define the default page number font and size 1. Click [Edit]. 2. Select the font and font size. 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 285 Configure banner pages and trailer pages Configure banner pages and trailer pages Banner and trailer pages are specific pages that are added to a job. When you enable these pages, these pages are added to all jobs. [161] Settings to enable the use of banner and trailer pages When you want to Solution Go to the location of ban1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System ner pages and trailer pages settings]→[Basic]. Use banner pages 1. Go to [Banner pages]. 2. Indicate that you want to use banner pages. 3. Click [OK]. Use trailer pages 1. Go to [Trailer pages]. 2. Indicate that you want to use trailer pages. 3. Click [OK]. Define the selection method of media you want to use for banner pages and trailer pages 1. Go to [Media of banner and trailer pages] . 2. Indicate that you want to use job media or want to define specific media. 3. Click [OK]. 286 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure banner pages and trailer pages When you want to Solution Define specific media for banner pages and trailer pages See Configure media of banner pages, trailer pages, tickets, separator sheets, and covers on page 288. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 287 Configure media of banner pages, trailer pages, tickets, separator sheets, and covers Configure media of banner pages, trailer pages, tickets, separator sheets, and covers In the job properties the use of covers and separator sheets can be selected. When banner pages and trailer pages are enabled, they are added to all jobs. (Configure banner pages and trailer pages on page 286) When you want to Solution Go to the location of media of banner pages, trailer pages, tickets, and covers 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[Print job defaults]. Media of separator sheets When you want to Solution Select media for separator sheets 1. Go to [Separator sheets]. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Select the media you want to use for separator sheets. 4. Indicate the delivery orientation of the separation sheets. 5. Click [OK]. Media of front covers [162] Media setting for front covers 288 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure media of banner pages, trailer pages, tickets, separator sheets, and covers When you want to Solution Select media for front covers 1. Go to [Front covers]. 2. Select the media you want to use for these media. 3. Click [OK]. Media of back covers [163] Media setting for back covers When you want to Solution Select media for back covers 1. Go to [Back covers]. 2. Select the media you want to use for back covers. 3. Click [OK]. Media of banner pages, trailer pages, and tickets [164] Media setting for banner pages, trailer pages, and tickets imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 289 Configure media of banner pages, trailer pages, tickets, separator sheets, and covers When you want to Solution Select media for banner pages, trailer pages, and tickets 1. Check if you indicated that you want to use specific media for these pages. (Configure banner pages and trailer pages on page 286) 2. Go to [Banner pages, trailer pages, and tickets]. 3. Select the media you want to use for these media. 4. Click [OK]. 290 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure intermediate check prints Configure intermediate check prints An intermediate check print is a print sample of a job sheet. Intermediate check prints are printed according to a set interval. [165] Settings to enable the use of intermediate check prints When you want to Solution Go to the intermediate check prints 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]→ [Basic]. Enable the intermediate check prints 1. Indicate the interval of intermediate check prints. 2. Click [Import]. Reset behavior of the timer 1. Indicate if you want to reset the counter for each job. 2. Click [Import]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 291 Configure finisher settings Configure finisher settings External finisher An external finisher is made by an external company and is supported by the printer. When you want to Solution Go to the external finisher settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[Print job defaults]. Define how to continue when an error in the finisher was solved 1. Go to [Error recovery method]. 2. Indicate if you want print the last set again or to continue after the last correctly printed sheet. 3. Click [OK]. 292 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure finisher settings When you want to Solution Define the default sheet orientation in the available output trays 1. Go to [Preferred feed edge]. 2. Indicate the feed direction of the sheets on the output tray. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Go to [Face orientation]. 5. Indicate if the front side of the sheets points up or down. 6. Click [OK]. 7. Go to [Header orientation]. 8. Indicate if the header points to the front side of the printer or to the back side of the printer. 9. Click [OK]. Define the default sheet order in the available output trays 1. Go to [Preferred sheet order]. 2. Indicate the order of the printed sheets within a job set. 3. Click [OK]. Define a meaningful name for the external finisher 1. Go to [Name]. 2. Enter a name. 3. Click [OK]. The name of the external finisher is visible in the job properties. Open the job properties and go to: [Print delivery]→[Output location]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 293 Configure finisher settings Stacker/stapler [166] Stacker / stapler settings When you want to Solution Go to the stacker / stapler settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[Print job defaults]. 4 294 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure finisher settings When you want to Solution Define the default sheet orientation in the available output trays 1. Go to [Upper tray - Preferred feed edge], [Lower tray - Preferred feed edge] or [Booklet tray - Preferred feed edge]. 2. Indicate the feed direction of the sheets on the output tray. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Go to [Upper tray - Preferred face direction], [Lower tray - Preferred face direction] or [Booklet tray - Preferred face direction]. 5. Indicate if the front side of the sheets points up or down. 6. Click [OK]. 7. Go to [Upper tray - Preferred header direction], [Lower tray Preferred header direction] or [Booklet tray - Preferred header direction]. 8. Indicate if the header points to the front side of the printer or to the back side of the printer. 9. Click [OK]. Define the default sheet order in the available output trays 1. Go to [Upper tray - Preferred sheet order], [Lower tray - Preferred sheet order] or [Booklet tray - Preferred sheet order]. 2. Indicate the order of the printed sheets within a job set. 3. Click [OK]. High capacity stacker There can be one or two high capacity stackers. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 295 Configure finisher settings [167] High capacity stacker settings When you want to Solution Go to the high capacity stacker settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[Print job defaults]. Define the default sheet orientation in the available output trays 1. Go to [Top tray - Preferred feed edge] or [Stack tray - Preferred feed edge]. 2. Indicate the feed direction of the sheets on the output tray. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Go to [Top tray - Face orientation] or [Stack tray - Face orientation]. 5. Indicate if the front side of the sheets points up or down. 6. Click [OK]. 7. Go to [Top tray - Header orientation] or [Stack tray - Header orientation]. 8. Indicate if the header points to the front side of the printer or to the back side of the printer. 9. Click [OK]. 296 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure finisher settings When you want to Solution Define the default sheet order in the available output trays 1. Go to [Top tray - Preferred sheet order] or [Stack tray - Preferred sheet order]. 2. Indicate the order of the printed sheets within a job set. 3. Click [OK]. Define default offset stacking in the stack tray 1. Go to [Stack tray - Offset stacking]. 2. Define the offset value. When the value is zero offset stacking is disabled. 3. Click [OK]. Perfect Binder [168] Perfect Binder settings When you want to Solution Go to the Perfect Binder settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[Print job defaults]. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 297 Configure finisher settings When you want to Solution Define the default sheet orientation in the available output trays 1. Go to [Stacker tray - Preferred feed edge]. 2. Indicate the feed direction of the sheets on the output tray. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Go to [Stacker tray - Preferred face direction]. 5. Indicate if the front side of the sheets points up or down. 6. Click [OK]. 7. Go to [Stacker tray - Preferred header direction]. 8. Indicate if the header points to the front side of the printer or to the back side of the printer. 9. Click [OK]. Define the default sheet order in the available output trays 1. Go to [Stacker tray - Preferred sheet order]. 2. Indicate the order of the printed sheets within a job set. 3. Click [OK]. 298 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure print quality settings Configure print quality settings Be aware that the print quality settings affect all print jobs. [169] Print quality settings When you want to Solution Go to the print quality settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]. Improve the print quality of 1. Go to [Edge enhancement for text]. small text 2. Indicate if you want stronger or smoother text edges. 3. Click [OK]. Improve the print quality of 1. Go to [Edge enhancement for graphics]. graphics 2. Indicate if you want stronger or smoother text edges. 3. Click [OK]. Change the print resolution In general, a larger resolution improves the print quality but affects job productivity. 1. Go to [Print sharpness]. 2. Indicate if you want smoother or sharper prints. 4 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 299 Configure print quality settings When you want to Solution Give priority to image qual- 1. Go to [Image compression optimisation]. ity or productivity 2. Indicate the required mode. 3. Click [OK]. Change the default halftone screen for the raster normal 1. Go to [Raster normal]. 2. Select the required raster. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Calibrate the printer and media families. (About calibration on page 186) Change the default halftone screen for the raster fine 1. Go to [Raster fine]. 2. Select the required raster. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Calibrate the printer and media families. (About calibration on page 186) 300 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure print quality settings When you want to Solution Print characters and lines thicker 1. Go to [Stroke width adjustment]. 2. Indicate if you want thicker characters and lines for the color black only or for all colors. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Go to [Width adjustment in horizontal direction]. 5. Indicate the level of thickness in the horizontal direction. 6. Click [OK]. 7. Go to [Width adjustment in vertical direction]. 8. Indicate the level of thickness in the vertical direction. 9. Click [OK]. 10. Go to [Condition for stroke width adjustment]. 11. Indicate if you want thicker characters and lines for all jobs or for 1200 dpi jobs only. 12. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 301 Configure PostScript, PDF, and PPML job defaults Configure PostScript, PDF, and PPML job defaults [170] Default PDF settings When you want to Solution Define PostScript defaults 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[PostScript]. 2. Use the table below for information on the options. Define PPML defaults 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[PPML]. 2. Use the table below for information on the options. Define PDF defaults 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[PDF]. 2. Use the table below for information on the options. 302 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure PostScript, PDF, and PPML job defaults When you want to Solution Define the default media • Use [Media color] to define the color of the default media. When you enter the color in the English language, a sample of the color is automatically displayed for the media. For other languages, enter the RGB value of the color in the media catalog. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [Media size] to define the default media size of the print jobs. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [Media type] to define the default media type of the print jobs. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [Media weight] to define the default media weight of the print jobs. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) Define the default output properties • Use [Print resolution] to define the default print resolution. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [Use PDF CropBox instead of MediaBox] to apply the PDF CropBox or the PDF MediaBox. The PDF MediaBox found in a job defines the size of the media used for printing. (Only for PDF) • Use [Use PDF XObject optimization] to indicate how XObjects are processed. [Automatic]: the XObjects of a PDF/VT job are cached. [Yes]: the XObjects of every PDF job are cached. [No]: the XObjects are re-interpreted per page. (Only for PDF) 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 303 Configure PostScript, PDF, and PPML job defaults When you want to Solution Define the default delivery of prints (1/2) • Use [Offset stacking] to indicate if default stacking occurs with or without an offset. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [Tumble] to set tumble for two-sided documents that are bound at the top or the bottom edge. The tumble option rotates the image on the back side of the sheet 180 degrees. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [Sort] to indicate if sorting occurs by set or by page. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [Staple position] to indicate if jobs are stapled and the location of the staples. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) Define the default delivery of prints (2/2) • Use [Output location] to select the output location. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) • Use [1-sided or 2-sided] to define if jobs are printed at one or two sides by default. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) 4 304 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure PostScript, PDF, and PPML job defaults When you want to Solution Define the substitution of a missing font • Use [PDF font substitution], [PPML font substitution], and [PostScript font substitution] to indicate that a missing font is replaced by the Courier font. Otherwise, a job is stopped and—if enabled—an error page is printed. (PDF, PostScript, PPML) Improve the print quality of • Use [Render large-sized text as graphics] to define from which large-sized text threshold value the halftone for graphics must be used for text. This option keeps the benefits of using the text halftone screen for small text. (PDF, PPML) Improve the print quality of • Use [Render thick lines as graphics] to define from which thick lines threshold value the halftone for graphics must be used for thick lines. This option keeps the benefits of using the halftone screen for thin lines. (PDF) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 305 Default workflow settings Default workflow settings Configure remote workload planning Remote Manager allows you to plan the workload remotely. Remote Manager runs on one of the PRISMAsync printers, the Remote Manager host. 306 When you want to Solution Enable Remote Manager. 1. Open the Settings Editor of the Remote Manager host. 2. Go to: [Preferences]→[System settings] 3. Enable the setting [Remote Manager]. See the list of printers connected to Remote Manager. The system administrator can change this list. 1. Open the Settings Editor of the Remote Manager host. 2. Go to: [Workflow]→[Remote Manager]. See the list of users that can use Remote Manager. The system administrator can show this list. 1. Open the Settings Editor of the Remote Manager host. 2. Go to: [Configuration]→[Groups]. 3. See the group [Central operators]. See the list of printers for the copy to function. The system administrator can change this list. 1. Open the Settings Editor of a PRISMAsync printer. 2. Go to: [Workflow]→[Remote Manager]. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure printing workflows Configure printing workflows [171] Printing workflow and job management settings When you want to Solution Go to the printing workflow settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]. Define the processing of The printer protocol LPD can be enabled by the system adminisjobs submitted via LPD/LPR trator. The print protocol LPR must be installed on the workstation that submit the jobs. 1. Go to [LPD]. 2. Indicate when the RIP starts to process jobs submitted via the LPR command. 3. Click [OK]. Define the processing of jobs that use the socket printing port Socket printing can be enabled and configured by the system administrator. 1. Go to [Socket printing]. 2. Indicate when the RIP starts to process jobs that use the socket printing port. 4 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 307 Configure printing workflows When you want to Solution Define the number of printed pages when an error occurs in a streaming job 1. Go to [Subset size for error recovery]. 2. Indicate the number of pages that will be printed when an error occurs in a streaming job. 3. Click [OK]. Define the order in which hotfolder jobs are handled See Configure hotfolders on page 319. Allow users to print from an USB drive 1. Go to [Print from USB]. 2. Indicate that printing from an USB drive is allowed 3. Click [OK]. Define where the RIP must process jobs 1. Go to [Location RIP process]. 2. Indicate if the RIP must process jobs only in the list of scheduled jobs or also in the list of waiting jobs and in the DocBox. 3. Click [OK]. Monitor jobs from a remote SNMP application Remote monitoring of jobs via SNMP can be enabled by the system administrator. 1. Go to [Job MIB enabled]. 2. Indicate that remote monitoring of jobs via SNMP is allowed. 3. Click [OK]. 308 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure printing workflows When you want to Solution Define if default originals are 1- or 2-sided 1. Go to [Original sides]. 2. Indicate if originals have information on one or both sides. 3. Click [OK]. Keep the job properties open after starting a copy or scan job 1. Go to [Easy copy and scan mode]. 2. Indicate that you want to enable the easy copy and scan mode 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 309 Configure the storage of printed jobs Configure the storage of printed jobs You can allow users to access printed jobs. Then, define the storage time of printed jobs. [172] Settings of printed jobs storage When you want to Solution Go to the printed jobs section 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Preferences]→[System settings]→[Printed jobs]. Store printed jobs The system administrator can change this setting. 1. Go to [Store printed jobs]. 2. Indicate that you want to store printed jobs. 3. Click [OK]. Define storage time of prin- The system administrator can change this setting. ted jobs 1. Go to [Storage time printed jobs]. 2. Select the storage time of printed jobs: one day, one week, one month, or unlimited. 3. Click [OK]. 310 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure the DoxBox function Configure the DoxBox function The system administrator can configure DoxBox settings. [173] The DocBox list When you want to Solution Go to the DocBox list 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Workflow]→[DocBox]. Add a DocBox 1. Click [Add]. 2. Enter a name for the DocBox. 3. Indicate if the user must use a PIN to access the DocBox. 4. Enter the PIN of the user. 5. Click [OK]. Edit a DocBox You cannot edit the DocBox 'Public' 1. Select a DocBox. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Change the required attributes. 4. Click [OK]. Delete a DocBox You cannot delete the DocBox 'Public' 1. Select a DocBox. 2. Click [Delete]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 311 Configure automated workflows Configure automated workflows With automated workflows you have the opportunity to assign properties to jobs addressed to a particular print queue. For example for jobs for a specific customer, for jobs that are submitted from a specific application, or for jobs that have the same job properties. There is one automated workflow. You can create custom automated workflows. [174] Automated workflows When you want to Solution Go to the automated workflows 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Workflow]→[Automated workflows]. Add an automated workflow 1. Click [Add]. 2. Use the tables below for information on the automated workflow options. 3. Click [OK]. Edit an automated workflow 1. Select an automated workflow. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Use the tables below for information on the automated workflow options. Delete an automated workflow 1. Select an automated workflow. 2. Click [Delete]. Restore the factory-defined automated workflow 1. Click [Restore]. Be aware that this action deletes all current automated workflows. 2. Click [OK]. Set the default color preset for an automated workflow 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color defaults]. 2. Go to [Default color preset for Océ PRISMAprepare®]. 3. Click [Default color preset] and select one of the available color presets in the list box. 4. Click [OK]. 312 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure automated workflows Attributes of automated workflows General and sets Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Queue name] Name of the automated workflow. For LPD/LPR printing this name is the name of the queue. The label name of a job that has used an automated workflow, also refers to this name. [Description] Description of the automated workflow. [Overrule job ticket] Job settings that are defined on other locations, are by default ignored to ensure that only the settings of the automated workflow are used. [Number of sets] Indicate the number of sets. [Sorting] Indicate if you want to sort the output per set or per page. Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Media] Select the media from the media catalog. [Fit to media size] Indicate if the page is scaled or clipped according to the media size. Media imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 313 Configure automated workflows Layout Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Print sides] Indicate if the output is printed 1- or 2-sided. [Orientation] Indicate if the reading direction of the document is parallel to the short edge or long edge of the page. [Rotate 180 degrees] Indicate if pages are rotated 180 degrees. [Tumble] Indicate if you bind two-sided documents at the top or the bottom edge. The tumble option rotates the image on the back side of the sheet 180 degrees. [Impositioning] Indicate if the multiple pages are printed on a sheet, for example to create a booklet. [Impositioning size] Select a size for booklets in case media are not selected. Special pages 314 Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Front or booklet cover] Select the media from the media catalog. [Front cover print on] Indicate if the cover is printed. [Back cover] Select the media from the media catalog. [Back cover print on] Indicate if the cover is printed. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure automated workflows Finishing Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Staples] Select the staple method and location. [Saddle press strength] Indicate the strength for saddle press stapling [Output location] Select the output location. [Sheet order] Select the order of the sheets in the output tray. [Feed edge] Select the orientation of the sheets in the output tray. [Header orientation] Select the orientation of the sheets in the output tray. [Offset stacking] Indicate if the set are delivered with an offset. [Offset after N sets] Indicate if a series of sets are delivered with an offset. [Punches] Select the number of punch holes and their location. [Folding] Select the folding method. [Fold side] Indicate the fold side. [Creasing] Indicate the pages you want to crease. [Trim] Select the trimming method. [Trim / target width ({0})] Enter the trim value or the width to which you want to trim. [Trim / target height ({0})] Enter the trim value or the height to which you want to trim. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 315 Configure automated workflows Print quality and color Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Image smoothing] Apply an anti-aliasing algorithm to smooth images with a low resolution. [Moiré reduction for images] Apply a Moiré reduction algorithm to enhance photographic images. When images have a resolution below 300 dpi, the Moiré reduction only takes effect when image smoothing is enabled. [Trapping preset] Select a trapping preset. [Color bar name], [Position], [Alignment] Select a color bar and its location. [Information bar name], [Position], [Alignment] Select an information bar and its location. [Color preset] Select a color preset. [Measurement chart printing] Use this setting only for printing measurement charts for G7 calibration or external profiling. IMPORTANT Improper use of this setting may cause pollution in the printer. 316 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure automated workflows Workflow Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Job destination] Select the destination of the jobs: scheduled jobs, waiting jobs or DocBox. [DocBox name] Select the DocBox. [Printing workflow] Select the job processing on the PRISMAsync Print Server. [Pages per record] Indicate if the PDF job is handled as variable data print job. Then, enter the pages per record. [Separator sheets] Indicate if separator sheets are used. You can use separator sets per a series of sets, if required. [PDF XObject optimization] Select whether PDF/X objects are cached per document or per page. [PDF to PostScript conversion] Indicate if you want to convert PDF to PostScript instead of only using the native PDF RIP, which is the default setting value. Accounting Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Account ID] Enter account ID. [Cost center] Enter cost center. [Custom] Enter extra account information. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 317 Configure automated workflows Page numbering Automatic workflow set‐ ting Description [Page numbers], [Start with Indicate if and where page number are printed. Enter text to be page number], [Position], printed before or behind the page number. [Text before page number], [Text after page number] 318 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure hotfolders Configure hotfolders A hotfolder is a shared folder on PRISMAsync Print Server. A hotfolder is linked to an automated workflow to determine the job settings for a hotfolder. The system administrator can configure hotfolder settings. [175] Hotfolders When you want to Solution Go to the hotfolders 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Workflow]→[DocBox]. Add a hotfolder 1. Click [Add]. 2. Enter a name for the hotfolder. 3. Select the automated workflow that has the required job settings. 4. Click [OK]. Edit a hotfolder 1. 2. 3. 4. Delete a hotfolder 1. Select a hotfolder. 2. Click [Delete]. imagePRESS C850 Series Select a hotfolder. Click [Edit]. Change the required attributes. Click [OK]. 4 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 319 Configure hotfolders When you want to Solution Enable and configure the hotfolder function 1. Click [Configure]. 2. Select the protocols you want to use. 3. Define a username and password. The username and password are required when you create a shortcut to a PRISMAsync hotfolder. 4. Click [OK]. 5. Restart the print system. Define the order in which hotfolder jobs are handled 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Workflow]→[System settings]. 2. Go to [Processing of hotfolder jobs]. 3. Indicate the order in which hotfolder jobs are handled. 4. Click [OK]. Create a shortcut to a hotfolder on a Windows system 320 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 1. Start the standard Windows wizard to map a network drive. 2. Use the link to connect to the PRISMAsync hotfolder to share documents or files. 3. Enter the path to the hotfolder. This path is displayed in the hotfolder settings in the Settings Editor. • For WebDAV use the format: http(s):// / or http(s):// / . • For SMB use the format: \\ \ or \\ \ . 4. Enter the username and password. 5. Enter a name for the network location. 6. Drag and drop the hotfolder to your desktop. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure hotfolders When you want to Solution Create a shortcut to a hotfolder on a MAC system 1. Open the Finder. 2. Click [Go] -> [Connect to Server...]. 3. Enter the path to the hotfolder. Use the format: http:// / or http:// / This path is displayed in the hotfolder settings in the Settings Editor. 4. Click [Connect]. 5. Enter the username and password. After approval of the login information, the Finder opens and automatically opens the mounted drive with the hotfolder name. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 321 Media management Media management Configure the media catalog The PRISMAsync Print Server media catalog lists all media that can be selected for jobs. You can change several media attributes. [176] The media catalog in the Settings Editor When you want to Solution Go to the media catalog 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Media]→[Media]. Import a media catalog or special media definitions Special media is the media for banner and trailer pages, separator sheets, tickets, covers, and auto gradation adjustment. 1. Click [Import]. 2. Indicate if you want to import the media catalog or the special media definitions. 3. Indicate if you want to replace or expand the media catalog or special media definitions. 4. Browse to the file. 5. Confirm the selection. 6. Click [Import]. Export the media catalog and special media definitions 1. Click [Export]. 2. Indicate if you want to export the media catalog or the special media definitions. 3. Click [Export]. 322 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure the media catalog When you want to Solution Restore the media catalog. 1. Click [Restore]. Please note you cannot undo this action. 2. Click [OK]. Show warnings when media miss attributes The system administrator can change this setting. 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Media]→[Configuration]. 2. Enable the setting [Warnings on missing media attributes]. 3. Click [OK]. Do media management from the control panel imagePRESS C850 Series The system administrator can change this setting. 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Media]→[Configuration]. 2. Enable the setting [Media management via control panel]. 3. Enable the setting [Media optimization via control panel]. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 323 Configure the media Configure the media The PRISMAsync Print Server media catalog lists all media that can be selected for jobs. You can change several media attributes. [177] The media catalog in the Settings Editor 324 When you want to Solution Go to the media catalog 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Media]→[Media]. Add media 1. Click [Add]. 2. Use the table below for information on the options. 3. Click [OK]. Copy media 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the media. Click [Copy]. Use the table below for information on the options. Click [OK]. Edit media 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the media. Click [Edit]. Use the table below for information on the options. Click [OK]. Delete media 1. Select the media. 2. Click [Delete]. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure the media Configure the media attributes [178] Media attributes Media attribute Description [Name] Name according to naming conventions. [Size] The size of the media. [Width] The width of the media. [Length] The length of the media. [Weight] The media weight of the media. [Surface type] The surface type of the media. [Image mirroring] Indicates if images must be mirrored. [Media family] The media family. [Standard type] The custom media type. [Custom type name] The custom type name according to naming conventions. [Tab] Indicates if the media are tab paper. [Insert] Indicates if the media are inserts. [Cycle length] Indicates the cycle length in case the media are tab paper. [Punch holes] Indicates the number of holes in case the media are punched. [Standard color] The color of the media. [Representation color] Indicates a custom color name. [Shape] Indicates if media is an envelope or letterhead media. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 325 Configure the media families Configure the media families Media families are groups of media that require similar color management and share the same output profile. For each media in the media catalog a media family is assigned. Next to an output profile there are also calibration curves and CMYK adjustment curves associated to a media family. [179] Media Families When you want to Solution Go to the media families 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Media]→[Media families]. Add a media family 1. Click [Add]. 2. Use the table below for information on the options 3. Click [OK]. Copy a media family 1. Select the media family. 2. Click [Copy]. 3. Click [OK]. Edit a media family 1. 2. 3. 4. Delete a media family 1. Select the media family. 2. Click [Delete]. Print a color reference chart 1. 2. 3. 4. Define the default media family 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color defaults]. Select the media family. Click [Edit]. Use the table below for information on the options Click [OK]. Select the media family. Click [Print]. Select the media. Click [OK]. 2. Go to [Default media family]. 3. Select the default media family. 4. Click [OK]. Print a media family calibration report 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Support]→[Troubleshooting]. 2. Click [Print media family calibration report]. 3. Click [OK]. 326 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure the media families When you want to Solution Show a warning symbol when a media family needs calibration 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Media]→[Configuration]. 2. Enable the setting [Warnings when media family needs calibration]. 3. Click [OK]. Configure the media family attributes [180] Edit media family Media family attribute Description [Name] Name according to naming conventions. [Description of media print mode] Indicates a description of the media family. [Calibration timer (days)] Indicates the media family calibration interval which can be set between 0 and 365 days, in steps of 1 day. Enter 0 to disable the media family calibration timer. [G7] Indicates a media family used for G7 calibration. [Default media for calibration] Indicates the default media used for printing the calibration charts. [Discard calibration data of internal sensor] Removes the calibration curves made with the internal sensor. [Output profile] Indicates the output profile of the media family. [Last calibration date] Indicates when the last calibration occurred. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 327 Color management Color management Configure printer calibration [181] Printer calibration settings When you want to Solution Go to the printer calibration settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color calibration]. Set a reminder for the shading correction procedure 1. Go to [Shading correction timer]. 2. Set the required time interval. 3. Go to 4. Click [OK]. 328 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure printer calibration When you want to Solution Set reminders for the Auto Gradation Adjustment procedure 1. Go to [Auto Gradation Adjustment timer for normal media], [Auto Gradation Adjustment timer for heavy media] and [Auto Gradation Adjustment timer for extra heavy media]. 2. Set the required time interval. 3. Click [OK]. Define the media for printer calibration 1. Go to [Media for calibration of media with normal weight], [Media for calibration of media with heavy weight] and [Media for calibration of media with extra heavy weight]. 2. Select the media for printer calibration. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Go to [Number of sheets for Auto Gradation Adjustment]. 5. Indicate the numbers of sheets for Auto Gradation Adjustment. More sheets increase the print quality but extends the duration of the procedure. 6. Click [OK]. Enable G7 calibration 1. Go to [G7 support]. 2. Indicate that you want to enable G7 calibration. [G7 support]. 3. Click [OK]. You can only disable G7 support when all G7 media families are removed. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 329 Configure color defaults Configure color defaults When you want to Solution Go to the color defaults 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color defaults]. [182] Color defaults 330 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure color defaults When you want to Description Configure color defaults (1/2) • Enable [Print black & white] if jobs are printed in black & white by default. • Enable [Image smoothing] to apply Moiré patterns in all images regardless their resolution. • Enable [Moiré reduction for images] to reduce Moiré patterns in images with a resolution of 300 dpi or higher. • Enable [PDF overprint simulation] to make opaque objects look transparent. Underlying objects become visible. If this setting is disabled, the colors on top will knock out all underlying colors. • Enable [Preserve pure black] to apply pure black preservation when possible. Pure black preservation means that the color black is composed of 100% K ink or toner. When pure black preservation is not possible or disabled, the color black is composed of a mixture of C, M, Y, and K inks. • Enable [Spot color matching] to apply spot color matching, which indicates that spot color definitions on the printer can be used. • Use [Default media family] to define the default media family for print jobs that arrive without media family information • Use [PDF/X output intent] to define if PDF files are printed according to their embedded output intent. The DeviceCMYK input profile and the job ticket are ignored. • Use [Halftone for images] to indicate the default halftone for images. • Use [Halftone for graphics] to indicate the default halftone for graphics. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 331 Configure color defaults When you want to Description Configure color defaults (2/2) • Use [Halftone for text/lines] to indicate the default halftone for text and lines. • Use [Color / resolution priority] if graphic objects with a high toner density may appear blurry at the edges of the graphic. Use this setting for sharp edges. The graphic objects may become less saturated. • Use [Overprinting black] to indicate if you want to force black objects to print over the background color. This option is used by the native PDF RIP to prevent registration artifacts. • Enable [Black Point Compensation (BPC)] for the relative colorimetric rendering intent. Black Point Compensation scales input colors relative to the output black in order to preserve details in dark areas. When the output black is rather light, [Enhanced BPC] is preferred over [Adobe BPC] because it has a better performance. 4 332 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure color defaults When you want to Description Define Device RGB input profiles • Use [DeviceRGB input profile] to select the default Device RGB input profile which defines a reference color workspace for the RGB data of the objects in the print job. • Use [DeviceRGB rendering intent] to select the default rendering intent which defines the color conversion strategy for outof-gamut colors. • Enable [Overrule RGB profile] to overrule the embedded color profile (RGB) of a document. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 333 Configure color defaults When you want to Description Define Device CMYK input profiles • Use [DeviceCMYK input profile] to select the default Device CMYK input profile which defines a reference color workspace for the CMYK data of the objects in the print job. • Use [DeviceCMYK rendering intent] to select the default rendering intent which defines the color conversion strategy for outof-gamut colors. • Enable [Overrule CMYK profile] to overrule the embedded color profile (CMYK) of a document. • Enable [Standard rules CMYK saturation intent] to indicate how the CMYK saturation intent must be handled. By default, the color management system preserves pure process colors. However, it can be required that the conversion must comply with standard color management rules. Then, color rendering occurs without pure process color preservation. This setting is also available in the job properties. Define the default color preset for PRISMAprepare Use [Default color preset] to indicate what color preset must be used for PRISMAprepare documents. 334 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure color presets Configure color presets The purpose of a color preset is to tune the printer to specific color preferences in your print environment. Color-related job settings are complex for most operators. Color presets help operators and prepress staff to understand and select the correct color settings. The same set of color presets is available in PRISMAprepare, automated workflows, PRISMAsync Remote Manager, the Settings Editor, and the control panel. The two factory-defined color presets are: • Office documents This color preset is optimal for color reproduction of text and graphical lines in office documents. PRISMAsync Print Server converts the colors to more saturated colors in the prints. • Photographic content This default color preset is optimal for the reproduction of photographs and images. In the Settings Editor you configure color presets at system level. [183] Color Presets Configure color presets When you want to Solution Go to the color presets 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color presets]. Add a color preset 1. 2. 3. 4. Click [Add]. Define the attributes of the color preset. Use the table below for information on the options. Click [OK]. Edit a color preset 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select a color preset. Click [Edit]. Define the required attributes of the color preset. Use the table below for information on the options. Click [OK]. Delete a color preset 1. Select the color preset. 2. Click [Delete]. Define the default color 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color defaults]→ preset for automated work[Default color preset for Océ PRISMAprepare®]. flows 2. Click [Default color preset]. 3. Select one of the available color presets in the [Default color preset] list box. 4. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 335 Configure color presets Attributes of a color preset Color preset attribute Description [Name] Name of the color preset. [Description] Description of the color preset. [DeviceRGB input profile] The Device RGB input profile which defines a reference color workspace for the RGB data of the objects in the print job. [DeviceRGB rendering intent] The Device RGB rendering intent which defines the color conversion strategy for out-of-gamut colors. [Overruling for RGB] Setting to overrule RGB embedded profiles and rendering intents. 4 336 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure color presets Color preset attribute Description [DeviceCMYK input profile] The Device CMYK input profile which defines a reference color workspace for the CMYK data of the objects in the print job. [DeviceCMYK rendering intent] The Device CMYK rendering intent which defines the color conversion strategy for out-of-gamut colors. [Overruling for CMYK] Setting to overrule the CMYK embedded profiles and rendering intents. [Standard rules CMYK saturation intent] Setting to indicate how the CMYK saturation intent must be handled. By default, the color management system preserves pure process colors. However, it can be required that the conversion must comply with standard color management rules. Then, color rendering occurs without pure process color preservation. [Spot color matching] Setting to indicate if the color preset includes the use of the spot color table with standard and customer created spot colors and their respective Lab and CMYK values. [Color mapping group] The color mapping group for the color preset, if spot color matching is enabled. [Halftone for text] The halftone for text/lines. [Halftone for images] The halftone for images [Halftone for graphics] The halftone for graphics. [Print in black and white] The setting to if all colors are printed using the black color channel only. [PDF overprint simulation] Setting to indicate if simulation of overprinting of all colors including spot colors must be applied. If this setting is disabled, the colors on top will knock out all underlying colors. [PDF/X output intent] Indication to print according to the embedded PDF/X output intent. Then, the Device CMYK definitions are ignored. PDF/X specifies the print conditions for which the PDF/X file was created. These 4 print conditions are called 'output intent'. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 337 Configure color presets 338 Color preset attribute Description [Overprinting black] Indication to force black text and graphics to print over the background color. This option is used by the native PDF RIP to prevent registration artifacts when black objects are printed on a colored background. [Preserve pure black] Setting to apply pure black preservation when possible. Pure black preservation means that the color black is composed of 100% K ink or toner. When pure black preservation is not possible or disabled, the color black is composed of a mixture of C, M, Y, and K inks. [Black Point Compensation (BPC)] Setting for the relative colorimetric rendering intent. Black Point Compensation scales input colors relative to the output black in order to preserve details in dark areas. When the output black is rather light, [Enhanced BPC] is preferred over [Adobe BPC] because it has a better performance. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure input profiles Configure input profiles Input and output profiles are used by PRISMAsync Print Server to link the CMYK or RGB input color spaces to the color space of the printer. The input profile is used to convert the input color space to the universal Profile Connection Space (PCS) color space model. Color presets and transaction printing setups include the definition of one of the available input profiles. For most print environments the factory defined input profiles are sufficient but, if required, you can import new input profiles. [184] Input profiles When you want to Solution Go to the input profiles 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Input profiles]. In the list you see the available input profiles, and if a input profile is in use and factory-defined. Import an input profile 1. Click [Import]. 2. Browse to the required .icc file. 3. Define a unique name and the description. 4. Click [OK]. Export an input profile 1. Click [Export]. 2. Browse to the location to store the input profile .icc file. Edit an input profile You only edit custom input profiles. 1. Select the input profile. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Change the name and description. 4. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 339 Configure input profiles 340 When you want to Solution Delete an input profile You only delete custom input profiles. 1. Select the input profile. 2. Click [Delete]. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure output profiles Configure output profiles Input and output profiles are used by PRISMAsync Print Server to link the CMYK or RGB input color spaces to a color space of the printer. The output profile is used to convert from the PCS color space to the printer color space. In practice, an output profile is used for (a group of ) media with more or less the same characteristics with respect to color reproduction. All media in the media catalog correspond with one of the available output profiles. A media family is a set of media that use the same output profile and calibration curves. (Configure the media families on page 326) You cannot delete or change the factory-defined output profiles. [185] Output profiles When you want to Solution Go to the output profiles 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Output profiles]. Import an output profile 1. Click [Import]. 2. Browse to the required .icc file. 3. Define a unique name and the description. 4. Indicate if the profile is for G7 calibration, if required. Export an output profile imagePRESS C850 Series 1. Click [Export]. 2. Browse to the location to store the output profile .icc file. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 341 Configure output profiles When you want to Solution Edit an output profile You only edit custom output profiles. 1. Select the output profile. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Change the name and description. 4. Change the G7 calibration indication. 5. Indicate if you want to create a composite output profile. (Configure composite output profiles on page 343) 6. Click [OK]. Delete an output profile 342 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer You only delete custom output profiles. 1. Select the output profile. 2. Click [Delete]. imagePRESS C850 Series Configure composite output profiles Configure composite output profiles You can use composite output profiles to simulate the color behavior of another output device or printing condition. In the Graphics Arts market it is common to align the colors between different printers or offset presses. The characteristics of the simulated printer become part of the composite output profile. The composite output profile needs to be assigned to a media family. Then, the media family needs to be assigned to media in the media catalog. Configure composite output profiles [186] Define a composite output profile When you want to Solution Create a simulation profile which specifies the input space of the Device Link 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Input profiles]. 2. 3. 4. 5. Create a composite output profile with a normal output profile Click [Import]. Browse to the input profile (.icc file) of the simulated printer. Define a unique name and the description. Click [OK]. 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Output profiles]. 2. Click [Import]. 3. Browse to the storage location of the output profile (.icc file). 4. In the [Import output profile] dialog: 1. Define a name and description of the output profile. 2. Select one of the available input profiles, that represents the input profile of the simulated printer or offset press. When you select [None], device simulation is turned off and a normal output profile is created. 3. Use the [Paper simulation] check box to enable paper simulation, for the selected simulation profile. When you paper simulation is enabled, the color of the media on the simulated printer is simulated. If paper simulation is enabled, the absolute colorimetric rendering intent is applied, otherwise relative colorimetric is applied. 5. Click [OK]. The composite output profile, together with its simulation profile are listed in the list of output profiles. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 343 Configure composite output profiles When you want to Solution Create a composite output profile with a Device Link profile 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Output profiles]. 2. Click [Import]. 3. Browse to the storage location of the Device Link (.icc file) of the simulated printer. 4. In the [Import device link] dialog: 1. Define a name and description of the composite output profile. 2. Select the simulation profile which specifies the input space of the Device Link. 5. Click [OK]. The Device Link, with a reference to its simulation profile, is listed in the list of output profiles. 344 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure spot colors and spot color libraries Configure spot colors and spot color libraries Spot colors realize a consistent color and are often used in logos and house style colors. PRISMAsync Print Server provides a spot color editor which contains a set of pre-defined spot color libraries, such as PANTONE libraries and HKS libraries. The library of custom spot colors contains the spot colors that users have created. The spot color configuration is offered in the Settings Editor and on the control panel. Spot color libraries can only be managed from the Settings Editor. If a print document contains a spot color the printer needs to know how to simulate that particular spot color for accurate color matching. Because ink behaves differently on different types of media, you can add CMYK color values for a media family / halftone combination. [187] Spot color libraries Configure spot color libraries The PRISMAsync Print Server Settings Editor offers a function to import other spot color libraries, named named color profiles. A named color profile has a standardized file format defined by the ICC (International Color Consortium). It contains a list of spot colors names with their Lab values. PRISMAsync Print Server provides a set of pre-defined spot color libraries, such as PANTONE libraries and HKS libraries. The library of custom spot colors contains the spot colors that users have created. The spot color configuration is offered in the Settings Editor and on the control panel. Spot color libraries can only be managed from the Settings Editor. There are three types of spot color libraries: • Custom spot colors • Imported spot colors • Pre-defined spot colors When you want to Solution Go to the spot color libraries 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Spot color libraries]. Import a spot color library 1. Click [Import]. (Named spot color profiles) 2. Select the file with the spot color library. 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 345 Configure spot colors and spot color libraries When you want to Solution Export a spot color library You can only export previously imported named spot color profiles. 1. Select the spot color library. 2. Click [Export]. 3. Click [OK]. Edit a spot color library You can only edit the name and description of previously imported named spot color profiles. 1. Select the spot color library. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Change the name and description. 4. Click [OK]. Delete a spot color library You can only delete previously imported named spot color profiles. 1. Select the spot color library. 2. Click [Delete]. Reset a spot color library You can only recover the contents of a pre-defined and previously imported named spot color profiles. The original spot color values are restored. 1. Select the spot color library. 2. Click [Reset]. Configure spot colors When you want to Solution Go to the spot colors 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Spot colors].. Search a spot color 1. Select the spot color library. 2. Enter a search string in the [Name] box. 3. Click [Filter]. 346 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure spot colors and spot color libraries When you want to Solution Add a spot color A spot color is the combination of a spot color name, the defined Lab value and a tint value. 1. Select [Custom library]. 2. Click [Add]. 3. Define the spot color attributes. 4. Use the table below for information on the options. 5. Click [OK]. Copy a spot color You can add a custom spot color by copying an existing spot color from one of the spot color libraries. You can edit the name but not the Lab values. 1. Search the spot color. 2. Click [Copy]. 3. Enter the name of the spot color. 4. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 347 Configure spot colors and spot color libraries When you want to Solution Edit a spot color 1. Select the spot color. 2. Click [Edit]. 3. Add CMYK values for media family / halftone combination. 4. Click [OK]. Delete a spot col- You can only delete custom spot colors. 1. Search the spot color. or 2. Click [Delete]. NOTE Edit the spot color to delete CMYK values for a media family / halftone combination. Restore the origi- You can only recover the values of spot colors of the pre-defined libraries nal values of a and previously imported named spot color profiles. spot color 1. Select the spot color library 2. Select one or more spot colors. 3. Click [Reset]. Spot color attributes Spot colors realize a consistent color and are often used in logos and house style colors. The CMYK value for the 100% tint of a spot color for the different media family / halftone combinations is always derived from the Lab value of a spot color, except for the media family / halftone combination for which the CMYK value was explicitly defined. When you change the individual CMYK values, the initial Lab value of the spot color remains unchanged. If a print document contains a spot color the printer needs to know how to simulate that particular spot color for accurate color matching. Because ink behaves differently on different types of media, you can add CMYK color values for a media family / halftone combination. 348 Spot color attributes Description [Name] Enter a unique name according to naming conventions. [Color] The [Old] color patch is the initial color. The [New] color patch shows the color of an added CMYK value for another media family / halftone combination. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure spot colors and spot color libraries Spot color attributes Description [Input mode] Lab: When a new color has been measured with a spectrophotometer it is easy to enter its Lab values. For fine-tuning you can specify the spot color values in CMYK. CMYK values are specified in percentages (0-100%, with step size of 1%). CMYK: When you define the CMYK values, you indicate the initial media family / halftone combination for correct interpretation of the CMYK values. [Tint] When a new custom color is defined, the color value (Lab or CMYK) for the 100% tint value of the spot color is specified. You can define CMYK values for tint values below 100%. [Media family] / [Halftone] When a custom spot color is created in Lab values initial CMYK values are calculated for a default media family / halftone combination for correct interpretation of the CMYK values. This media family / halftone combination is referred to as the initial media family / halftone combination. Add more CMYK values for other combinations. [Step size] The chosen step size determines the degree of patch variations. This step size is a percentages (1 - 20). [Print patch chart] Print a patch chart to fine-tune CMYK values or check the printed spot color. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 349 Configure spot colors and spot color libraries Spot color attributes Description [Add CMYK value] You can add CMYK values of a spot color for other media family / halftone combinations. 1. Select the spot color. 2. [188] Lab values of a spot color Click [Edit]. 3. [189] CMYK values of a spot color Click [Add CMYK value]. The CMYK value is displayed for a media family / halftone combination. When you select an other combination the values are adjusted automatically. 4. Fine-tune the values or first print a patch chart. 350 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure color mappings Configure color mappings Color mapping is a function that maps (transforms) the source color value of text and graphic elements to a different target color value. This means that color mapping replaces the color management of the applicable colors. The target spot color is already calibrated for the media family. Color mapping is applied during the job RIP process. This includes the information of color bars and information bars. You add one or more color mappings to a color mapping group. A color mapping group allows you to apply color mappings per job or per customer via a color preset. When spot color matching is enabled in the color preset definition, a color mapping group can be selected. [190] Color mappings Configure color mappings When you want to Solution Go to the color mappings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Color]→[Color mappings]. Add a color mapping group 1. Click [Add group]. 2. Define a name and description. 3. Click [OK]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 351 Configure color mappings When you want to Solution Add a color mapping to a group 1. Select one of the color mapping groups. 2. Click [Add color mapping]. 3. Use the table below for information on the options. 4. Click OK. Copy a color mapping 1. Select the color mapping group. 2. Click [Copy]. Edit a color mapping 1. 2. 3. 4. Delete a color mapping 1. Select one or more color mapping groups. 2. Click [Delete]. Move a color mapping to another group 1. Select the color mapping group. 2. Click Move. 3. Select the new group. Select the color mapping group. Click [Edit]. Change the name and description. Click [OK]. Configure the color mapping attributes [191] Edit color mapping 352 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure color mappings Color mapping attributes Description [Source type] Specify the source color as one of the following: • RGB color value, • CMYK color value, • spot color from the spot color library, • spot color from the custom spot color library. NOTE Search in the list of installed spot colors, by entering a part of the spot color name. [Value type] The channels of an RGB color are specified as an 8-bit numbers (0-255) or as percentages (0-100). The channels of a CMYK color are specified as percentages (0-100). [Source color]: Depending on the source type and value type, define the source color. Spot color: • spot color from the spot color library, • spot color that is included in a spot color library, • spot color from the custom spot color library, • special spot color: 'Cyan', 'Magenta', 'Yellow', 'Black', 'All', 'None'. NOTE Search in the list of installed spot colors, by entering a part of the spot color name. RGB: enter values for [Red],[Green],[Blue]. CMYK: enter values for [Cyan], [Magenta], [Yellow], [Black]. [Tolerance] The tolerance of a source color entered as an 8-bit number is an absolute number (0-7). The tolerance of a source color entered as percentage is a percentage point (0-3). The tolerance of a spot color is not enabled. [Target spot color] Specify the target color as one of the following: • spot color from the spot color library, • spot color from the custom spot color library, • special spot color: 'Cyan', 'Magenta', 'Yellow', 'Black', 'All', 'None', NOTE Search in the list of installed spot colors, by entering a part of the spot color name. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 353 Configure color mappings Map to a special spot color Spot color Description 'Cyan', 'Magenta', 'Yellow', 'Black' A mapping to one of these spot colors places ink of that color on the locations of that source color. No color management is applied to this target color . 'All' A mapping to this spot color places all inks on the location of that source color. This results in black which is called rich black. Rich black is a color solution to create a deeper, blacker black than standard black ink. The printer prints 100% black with the addition of each of the other process colors. 'None' A mapping of a spot color makes objects with that color invisible on the print. This can be useful for including markers for that are read by the finishing equipment. 354 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Transaction printing Transaction printing Configure the transaction printing The transaction printing feature provides several groups of configuration settings. You can configure transaction setups to be used for the printing of jobs (Configure transaction setups on page 356), manage resources (Configure the resource management on page 370), and configure some general settings. imagePRESS C850 Series transaction printing is based on the IPDS bidirectional communication protocol. [192] Transaction printing settings When you want to Solution Go to the transaction printing settings 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing]→ [Settings]. Bring transaction printing online 1. See Open and load a transaction setup on page 358. NOTE You can also use the control panel to bring transaction printing online. (Print in transaction printing mode on page 176) Set the active PDL 1. Click [Requested active PDL]. Enable remote diagnostics 1. Click [Remote diagnostics protocol]. Set the IPDS port 1. Click [IPDS port]. Set the PCL port 1. Click [PCL port]. Import or export SRA configuration files on request of your Service organization 1. Click [Import] or [Export]. imagePRESS C850 Series IMPORTANT Inappropriate use of these functions can damage your printer configuration. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 355 Configure transaction setups Configure transaction setups A transaction printing setup is a set of attributes that are used for transaction printing. You can create different setups, but only one setup can be loaded and is active. When transaction printing is offline, you open and load a transaction setup via the control panel or the Settings Editor. (Open and load a transaction setup on page 358,Print in transaction printing mode on page 176) The attributes of the active (loaded) transaction setup define the default properties of the output of the submitted data stream. [193] Transaction printing setups 356 When you want to Solution Go to the transaction setups 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing]→ [Setups]. Add a setup 1. Click [Add]. 2. Define a unique name and a description. 3. Click [OK]. Copy a setup 1. 2. 3. 4. Edit a setup 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the setup. Click [Open]. Click [Edit]. Click the [IPDS setup] or [PCL setup] tab. Change one or more setup attributes. (Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup on page 359, Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup on page 365) 6. Click [OK]. Delete a setup 1. Select the setup. 2. Click [Delete]. Import a setup 1. 2. 3. 4. Export a setup 1. Select the setup. 2. Click [Export]. 3. Click [OK]. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer Select a setup. Click [Copy]. Define a unique name and a description. Click [OK]. Click [Import]. Browse to the files. Confirm the selection. Click [OK]. 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Configure transaction setups When you want to Solution Restore the original values of the default transaction setup and remove the custom transaction setups 1. Click [Restore]. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 357 Open and load a transaction setup Open and load a transaction setup A transaction printing setup is a set of attributes that are used for transaction printing. You can create different setups, but only one setup can be loaded and is active. (Configure transaction setups on page 356) When transaction printing is offline, you open and load a transaction setup via the control panel or the Settings Editor. (Print in transaction printing mode on page 176) [194] Transaction printing setups When you want to Solution Display the transaction setups and their status 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing]→ [Setups]. [Loaded]: When a transaction setup is marked [Loaded], it is active. [Opened]: When a transaction setup is marked [Opened], it can be edited. Open a setup to define or change the attributes 1. Select the transaction setup. 2. Click [Open]. 3. Configure the transaction setup. (Configure transaction setups on page 356) NOTE Only one setup can be open. Load a setup to make it active 1. Select the transaction setup. 2. Click [Load]. NOTE This loaded setup becomes the active setup, the moment that transaction printing is put online. 358 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup A transaction printing setup is a set of attributes that are used for transaction printing. You can create different setups, but only one setup can be loaded and is active. (Configure transaction setups on page 356) The attributes of the active (loaded) transaction setup define the default properties of the output of the submitted data stream. When you want to Solution Go to the IPDS transaction setup 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing]→ [IPDS setup]. [IPDS] attributes Description [Tray selection mechanism] There are two modes: [Tray to tray] and [Tray to media] Below this table the two modes are described. [Data resolution] Specify the resolution of the bitmaps the printer can accept. [Default output location] When the output location is not indicated in the data stream, the printer uses this default value. [Offset stacking] Indicate if you want to use offset stacking for the jobs that use this setup. [Font capture] Indicate if fonts can be captured from jobs for later reference. This setting also defines if captured or installed resources can be selected at a later moment. [Extend the logical page (millipoints)] When you want to print with a slightly larger page size, you can increase the logical page size with the entered number of millipoints (unit of angle measurement). [Output recovery] Adjust the error recovery method to keep the printed output according to the original source. First select [Suppressed], and then use the [Suppressed Mode] mode to select [Secure]. [Face orientation] Define the default delivery orientation in the output location: [Face up] or [Face down]. [IPDS] imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 359 Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup [IPDS] attributes Description [Z-fold mode] When a mixed-size set must both be Z-folded and stapled. Tray mapping The IPDS data stream contains a reference to a logical tray. In the active transaction setup you link logical trays to the media selection. There are 36 logical trays that can be assigned to a physical paper tray or to media. The way how job media are assigned to a logical job is determined by the tray mapping mode of the active transaction setup. Although media selections are always done via a logical tray selection, a transaction printing job always uses the media descriptions as specified in the media catalog. Two modes are available that are explained below. Tray-to-media mapping You link logical trays (indicated by a number) to media from the media catalog. The printer maps the media of the logical tray to the physical paper trays that hold these media. For color management, the output profile associated with the media family of the media is used. The schedule shows the media the job uses. Tray-to-tray mapping You link a logical tray (indicated by a number) to a physical tray. The printer uses the media that are loaded in this physical paper tray. The schedule shows the media the job uses. For color management, the output profile associated with the media family of the media is used. 360 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup [PDF specific] PDF attributes Description [PDF spot color 'All'] PDF data have a number of pre-defined spot color names. The color name 'All' means that the RIP uses a 100% coverage of all the available colors. The color 'All' is intended for alignment marks. You can force the RIP to only use 100% black. Note that if the printer supports a separate MICR station, the color name 'All' implies that MICR pixels are used as well. [PDF enable cache] Indicate if you want to use the PDF cache to automatically identify and store objects that are used more than once in the job. [PDF overprint simulation] Indicate if simulation of overprinting of all colors must be applied. If this setting is disabled, the colors on top will knock out all underlying colors. [Color management] imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 361 Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup Setup attributes Description [Default CMYK input profile][Default monochrome CMYK input profile][Default RGB input profile][Default monochrome RGB input profile] Select one of the configured input profiles per color space. (Configure input profiles on page 339) [Rendering intent] The selected default rendering intent is only used for jobs where no rendering intents and input profiles are specified. [Print full color or black & white] Indicate if printing occurs in black & white or full color. [Ignore toner transfer curve The standard behavior is to interpret and use the data from the dafrom data stream] ta stream. Indicate if you want the printer to ignore the tone transfer curves which are included in the data stream. [Ignore embedded output profile] The standard behavior is to overrule the embedded output profile. Indicate if you want to use the embedded output profile. [Black preservation] Indicate if you want to apply pure black preservation when possible. Pure black preservation means that the color black is composed of 100% K ink or toner. When pure black preservation is not possible or disabled, the color black is composed of a mixture of C, M, Y, and K toner or ink. This option only affects IPDS, PDF text, and PDF lines. It has no effect on RGB images. [Halftone] Indicate the halftone. [IPDS image shift] Setup attributes Description [Image shift in feed direction of side 1] [Image shift in cross-feed direction of side 1] When you use preprinted media with marked areas for specific text, misalignments can occur. This setting is also useful to better align variable data on the page, such as names or addresses. To correct these misalignments, shift the image in the feed direction or cross-feed direction of the front and back side. You can also adjust the image shift from the control panel. (Print in transaction printing mode on page 176) Tray linking For both tray mapping modes physical trays that contain the same media are automatically linked. This means that when the referred tray is empty, printing continues from an other tray that holds the same media. 362 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup Error recovery When multiple pages for the same document are not allowed, for example for lotteries and bank accounts, adjust the error recovery behavior in the transaction setup. PRISMAsync Print Server and the host can be involved in recovering the errors. Use the table below to choose a recovery behavior. Error recovery modes Description [Normal] recovery PRISMAsync Print Server recovers the print process from the point where the error occurred. This may result in double prints. [Suppressed], [Normal] recovery The host recovers the print process from the point the error occurred. This may result in double prints. [Suppressed Mode], [Secure] recovery The host recovers errors and prevents duplicates. Intermediate check prints are disabled. The printer reports to the host which sheets are involved in errors. Color stations If required you can define your own simple names for the colors in your application or names from one of the color naming schemes used in the graphics industry. Color station definition Description [Color number] Enter a unique value (1-254) to specify every color station except the K station, to enable a color selection by a number. The Black color station has the value of zero and cannot be edited. The other default color numbers are: • Cyan, 1 • Magenta, 2 • Yellow, 3 • MICR, 5 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 363 Configure attributes of an IPDS transaction setup 364 Color station definition Description Color station name Names are encoded by UTF-16 Unicode. For every color station six names can be specified, to enable a color selection by a name. For Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow station, the default list of color names is empty. For the MICR color station, the default list of color names is not empty, but contains the names 'MICR', 'micr' and 'Micr'. The names 'Gray', 'Cyan', 'Magenta ', 'Yellow ', 'Black ', 'All ', 'None' are reserved for PDF and are not allowed. Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup A transaction printing setup is a set of attributes that are used for transaction printing. You can create different setups, but only one setup can be loaded and is active. (Configure transaction setups on page 356) The attributes of the active (loaded) transaction setup define the default properties of the output of the submitted data stream. When you want to Solution Go to the PCL setup 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing]→ [PCL setup]. [PCL] attributes Description [Use default tray-to-tray mechanism] In tray-to-tray mode, a default tray mapping table is used when enabling this setting. This default tray mapping table cannot be changed. [Tray selection mechanism] There are two modes: [Tray to tray] and [Tray to media] Below this table the two modes are described. [Default output location] When the output location is not indicated in the data stream, the printer uses this default value. [Offset stacking] Indicate if you want to use offset stacking for the jobs that use this setup. [Print mode] Indicate whether the printer must print the jobs 1-sided, 2-sided or tumble by default. You can overrule this setting in the printstream. [Number of copies] Specify the default number of sets you want to print per job. Collate is set to off by default, so pages are printed in order (e.g. 111, 222, 333, ...). [Default orientation] Select the default orientation for the image of your document. [PCL] imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 4 365 Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup [PCL] attributes Description [Lines per page] When the number of lines changes, the line height also changes. More lines on a page result in smaller line heights. The default number of lines per page depends on the orientation and the default paper format. The default value changes for landscape orientation. [Face orientation] Indicate of you wan to overrule the default face orientation of the requested finisher. This setting is only active for transaction printing jobs. [Print a PCL-XL error page] Indicate the system must print an error page in case of a PCL-XL error. [Ignore empty pages] Indicate if the system must skip empty pages. Tray mapping The PCL data stream contains a reference to a logical tray. In the active transaction setup you link logical trays to the media selection. There are 36 logical trays that can be assigned to a physical paper tray or to media. The way how job media are assigned to a logical job is determined by the tray mapping mode of the active transaction setup. Although media selections are always done via a logical tray selection, a transaction printing job always uses the media descriptions as specified in the media catalog. Two modes are available that are explained below. Tray-to-media mapping You link logical trays (indicated by a number) to media from the media catalog. The printer maps the media of the logical tray to the physical paper trays that hold these media. For color management, the output profile associated with the media family of the media is used. The schedule shows the media the job uses. 366 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup Tray-to-tray mapping You link a logical tray (indicated by a number) to a physical tray. The printer uses the media that are loaded in this physical paper tray. The schedule shows the media the job uses. For color management, the output profile associated with the media family of the media is used. Tray linking For both tray mapping modes physical trays that contain the same media are automatically linked. This means that when the referred tray is empty, printing continues from an other tray that holds the same media. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 367 Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup [Color management] Setup attributes Description [Default CMYK input profile][Default monochrome CMYK input profile][Default RGB input profile][Default monochrome RGB input profile] Select one of the configured input profiles per color space. (Configure input profiles on page 339) [Rendering intent] The selected default rendering intent is only used for jobs where no rendering intents and input profiles are specified. [Print full color or black & white] Indicate if printing occurs in black & white or full color. [Ignore toner transfer curve The standard behavior is to interpret and use the data from the dafrom data stream] ta stream. Indicate if you want the printer to ignore the tone transfer curves which are included in the data stream. [Ignore embedded output profile] The standard behavior is to overrule the embedded output profile. Indicate if you want to use the embedded output profile. [Black preservation] Indicate if you want to apply pure black preservation when possible. Pure black preservation means that the color black is composed of 100% K ink or toner. When pure black preservation is not possible or disabled, the color black is composed of a mixture of C, M, Y, and K toner or ink. This option only affects PCL, PDF text, and PDF lines. It has no effect on RGB images. [Halftone] Indicate the halftone. [PCL image shift] 368 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure attributes of a PCL transaction setup Setup attributes Description [Image shift in feed direction of side 1] [Image shift in cross-feed direction of side 1] When you use preprinted media with marked areas for specific text, misalignments can occur. This setting is also useful to better align variable data on the page, such as names or addresses. To correct these misalignments, shift the image in the feed direction or cross-feed direction of the front and back side. You can also adjust the image shift from the control panel. (Print in transaction printing mode on page 176) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 369 Configure the resource management Configure the resource management There are several types of resources that you can manage and use for transaction printing: 1. Fonts 2. Code pages 3. Color mapping tables 4. Data objects, such as font files, image types or color management resources The imagePRESS C850 Series uses the following resource life cycles. 1. Captured resource: The IPDS host can download a resource when a required resource is not available on the printer. To increase the performance the downloaded IPDS resources can be captured on the printer disk for later reuse. The IPDS host is informed about the availability of the resource but still needs to activate the resource. Captured resources are visible in the Settings Editor. Only when the [Font capture] function in the loaded transaction setup is set to enabled the capturing of resources takes place. This setting also controls whether captured or installed resources are selectable. Note that due to the IPDS host configuration there can be downloaded resource which are not captured. 2. Imported resource: Resources can be imported one by one or in a batch. Imported resources are visible in the Settings Editor. 3. Installed resource: Imported resources can be installed. The installed resources are visible in the Settings Editor. 4. Permanent resource: Permanent resources are factory installed and are not visible in the Settings Editor. [195] Resources for transaction printing When you want to Solution Go to transaction printing resource management 1. Open the Settings Editor and go to: [Transaction printing]→ [Resource management]. Use the table below to see which management tasks are allowed for each life cycle and resource type combination. 370 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Configure the resource management Tasks Fonts Fonts for embedded PDF Code pages Color map‐ ping table Data objects Import resource file ** Yes Yes Yes Yes No Install imported resource ** Yes Yes Yes Yes No Delete imported resource ** Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Delete installed resource ** Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Delete permanent resource ** No No No No No Delete captured resource ** Yes No Yes No Yes Capture resources *** Yes* No Yes* No Yes Set default resources ** Yes No Yes Yes No * A captured bitmap font is related to a specific captured code page. When one of these captured resources is deleted, the other related captured resource is also deleted. ** You can only perform this task when transaction printing is offline. *** Capturing resources can only take place when transaction printing is online. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 13 - Configure the printer 371 Configure the resource management 372 Chapter 13 - Configure the printer imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 14 Help Problem Solving Problem Solving Problems occur due to a print system or a job handling problem. Below you can find an overview of solutions for problems that can occur. Problem Solution Paper jam Follow the instructions on the control panel. After you have solved a paper jam, the print process resumes from the set where the jam occurred. Check for double prints. Machine error Follow the instructions on the control panel. The control panel informs you if a restart of the print system is necessary. Service required Follow the instructions on the control panel. The control panel informs if you must contact your service organization. Unit reconditioning Follow the instructions on the control panel. When you have solved the problem, the print process resumes from the set where the problem occurred. The control panel may ask to remove sheets. Print system cannot determine if the output is complete. Follow the instructions on the control panel and check the output. The print system asks you to confirm that the printed output is complete. Printed output or originals have streaks or spots. Perform a procedure to clean machine parts. (Cleaning tasks and procedures on page 251) For some procedures you must have the rights to perform maintenance tasks. A paper tray does not open. Check if you closed all paper trays correctly. Printed media has curls. Perform the curled output media correction procedure. (Correct curled output media on page 217) Images on the printed output are not aligned correctly. Perform a media registration. (Adjust the media registration on page 218) Images on the printed output are skewed or slightly rotated. Perform the skewed and rotated image correction procedure. (Adjust the media registration on page 218) Similar colors for text and color panes in the source document are different on the printed output. Perform a media calibration for all halftones. (Calibrate the media family on page 190) Similar colors in the source When the different media are in two media families, calibrate both document are different on media families. (Calibrate the media family on page 190) different media. If the different media are in one media family, create a new media family with new output profiles and calibrate the new media family. (Calibrate the media family on page 190) 374 Chapter 14 - Help 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Problem Solving Problem Solution CMYK colors are not correctly aligned. Perform the automatic color mismatch procedure. (Automatic color mismatch correction on page 195) Printed output has white gaps between color panes. Enable the trapping preset setting. (Print quality settings on page 382) You can create new trapping presets. (Create a trapping preset on page 196) An uneven density occurs. 1. Perform the professional Auto gradation adjustment procedure. 2. Perform the Shading correction procedure. (About calibration on page 186) Gradation problem occurs: 1. Reset the Auto gradation adjustment calibration curves. Automatic gradation ad2. Perform the Auto gradation adjustment procedure. justment shows strange re(About calibration on page 186) sults. Automatic gradation adjustment does not work. Temperature or humidity Perform the standard or professional Auto gradation adjustment changes significantly in the procedure. (About calibration on page 186) print environment. Uneven color planes occur. The Shading correction procedure assures consistent, even color planes on the output. (About calibration on page 186) Slight color tone deviations If printer calibration and media family calibration cannot correct over time. the slight color deviations you can use the automatic correction color tone (ACCT) function. (Correct the color tones with the ACCT function on page 203) When also the ACCT function cannot fix the color tone deviations, contact your service organization. Moiré patterns occur on the printed output. imagePRESS C850 Series Change the image smoothing setting. (Print quality settings on page 382) Chapter 14 - Help 375 Optimize the scan quality of the print system Optimize the scan quality of the print system The print system detects photos, rasters and fine lines on the originals and makes sure that the copy and scan job have the correct layout and quality. Below you find an overview of solutions on problems with scan and copy output. Problem Solution A scanned page is upside down. Place the original, with the correct orientation, into the automatic document feeder or on the glass plate, and then scan the originals again. ( Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 124, Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 126) 376 Every second scanned page is upside down. Select the correct original and document layout settings, and scan the originals again. (Scan job settings on page 388, Copy job settings on page 385) The image position is not correct on all pages. • Place the originals with the correct orientation into the automatic document feeder, and then scan the originals again. (Use the automatic document feeder to copy or scan on page 124, Use the glass plate to copy or scan on page 126) • Select the correct original and document layout settings, and scan the originals again. (Scan job settings on page 388, Copy job settings on page 385) • Use another application to check the results. The information area on the page is not scaled correctly. • Select the correct original and document layout settings, and scan the originals again. (Scan job settings on page 388, Copy job settings on page 385) • Use the correct zoom factor. (Zoom function on page 409) The information on the page is too light or too dark. Select the correct [Adjust image] settings. Chapter 14 - Help imagePRESS C850 Series Fix "density not within required range" error Fix "density not within required range" error In exceptional cases the shading correction procedure fails with a "density not within required range" message. If this happens, perform the correction procedure to fix the problem. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Printer calibration details]. Select [Auto gradation adjustment]. Select [Shading correction]. Touch [Start printer calibration]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. Touch [System] -> [Color adjustment] -> [Printer calibration details]. Deselect [Shading correction]. Select [Auto gradation adjustment]. Touch [Start printer calibration]. Follow the instructions on the control panel. Close the menu. After you finish When the [Shading correction] procedure still fails, contact your service organization. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 14 - Help 377 Fix "density not within required range" error 378 Chapter 14 - Help imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 References Job settings Job settings Print job settings The following tables show the print job properties you can change on the control panel. Layout settings 380 Property Job setting What you can define Printing [1- or 2-sided] Print on one or two sides of the sheet Binding edge [Binding edge] The required orientation and binding location of the printed sheets. The chosen layout of the document automatically sets the default orientation and binding edge. Media [Media] Selection of media for the job Covers [Cover] The covers to the printed document and if they need to be printed: • Front and back cover • Print on the cover or not • Media for the cover Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Print job settings Property Job setting What you can define Booklet, multiple pages per sheet [Layout] Print more than one page of a document on a single side of the sheet. Indicate how you want to print pages on the sheets: • Booklet printing, to print a multipage document as booklet. The pages are laid out two per sheet. When the two-sided sheets are collated, folded, and stapled, the result is a single book with the correct page order. • Multiple-up printing, to print more than one different pages together on a single sheet side. • Same-up printing, to print the same page more than once on a single sheet side. Scale images [Zoom] A manual or automatic adjustment of the scaling factor: • Automatic zoom according to set print size • Manual zoom from 25% - 400% Image alignment to specific position [Align] Indicate if the page images must be moved to corners, edges, or the middle of a sheet. This provides extra space for margins, punch holes, or a binding method. Image shift to exact position [Shift] Indicate if the page images must be shifted on the front and / or back of the sheet. You can shift the image horizontally and vertically. Margin erase [Margin erase] Margin erase for one or more page edges with a maximum of 100 mm / 3.94" Property Job setting What you can define Output location -> [Print delivery] [Output location] Selection of the output location The selected finishing method can require a specific output location. Sorting method -> [Print delivery] [Sort] Sorting by page or by sets Offset stacking -> [Print delivery] [Offset stacking] Stacking with or without an offset Offset stacking depends on the active workflow profile. (Choose a workflow profile on page 68) Advanced settings -> [Print delivery] [Advanced settings] The delivery method of the sheets in the output location of your choice: • Delivery order of the sheets • Delivery position of the sheets • Delivery with rotated sheets Delivery settings Apply these settings for one or more finishing optionals. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 381 Print job settings Print quality settings Property Job setting What you can define Color image adjustment [Adjust image] Adjustment of CMYK values on job level (Adjust CMYK curves for a job on page 164) The advanced mode enables adjustment of control points throughout the tonal range of an image. Also, in this mode you can preserve colors for example logo colors and use preset CMYK curves. Color preset [Print quality] -> [Color settings] Selection of the color preset or adjustment of its collection of color settings: • Color input profile, rendering intent, and halftones to indicate if you want to overrule embedded color profiles and rendering intents. • Standard rules for CMYK saturation intent to indicate if the color management system must preserve pure process colors or comply with standard color management rules. • Spot color matching. The PRISMAsync Print Server contains a spot color table with standard and customer-created spot colors, together with their respective CIELAB and CMYK values. • Print in black & white for black & white prints. • PDF overprint to make opaque objects look transparent. Underlying objects are visible. • PDF/X output intent to print with the embedded output intent. In this case, the color space for device CMYK as specified in the system settings and the job ticket is ignored. • Overprinting black to make fine black text, lines and graphics more visible on a colored background. • Preserve pure black to apply pure black preservation when possible. Pure black preservation means that the color black is composed of 100% K ink or toner. When pure black preservation is not possible or disabled, the color black is composed of a mixture of C, M, Y, and K inks. • Black point compensation (BPC) to render input colors relative to the output black in order to preserve details in dark areas. If the output black is too light, enhanced mode is preferred over Adobe BPC because it has a better performance. The color presets are created in the Settings Editor. 382 Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Print job settings Property Job setting What you can define Print resolution [Print quality] Selection of the print resolution. Color quality information [Print quality] • Printing of a color control bar on the document. • Printing of an information bar on the document. The information bars and color control bars are created in the Settings Editor. Color quality adjustment [Print quality] -> [Quality adjustments] There are several settings available to adjust the color quality: • Image smoothing selection to reduce Moiré patterns in all images regardless of their resolution. • Moiré reduction for images selection to reduce Moiré patterns in images with a resolution of 300 dpi or higher. • Trapping selection to use a trapping preset. Create custom trapping presets on the System view. • Color or resolution priority selection to print objects with a high toner density and blurry edges with sharp edges. The graphic objects may become less saturated. • Print sharpness selection to change the print resolution. In general, a larger resolution improves the print quality but affects job productivity. • Edge enhancement for text selection to improve the print quality of text. • Render text as graphics selection to improve the print quality of large-sized text. This option keeps the benefits of using the text halftone screen for small text. Page numbering [Print quality] -> [Page numbering] Indicate if you want to have page numbers on the printed documents. Job setting What you can define Finishing settings Property Binding of printed sets [Binding] Stapling and saddle-stitch settings Folding method [Folding] How to fold the printed documents Trimming method [Trimming] How to trim the printed documents Punching or creasing [Punching] [Creasing] Depending on the current, installed die set on the printer, you can define either the method of punching or the method of creasing. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 383 Print job settings Page Programming Function Job setting What you can define Page adding [Insert] Add a page before or after one or more page ranges or subsets Subset or page range deletion [Delete] Delete one or more page ranges or subsets Selection of job parts [Select] Select page ranges or subsets according to selection criteria Combine subsets [Merge] Select subsets to merge Split combined subsets [Split] Split subset into original subsets Redefine finishing settings for subsets [Merge finishing] Apply the finishing properties of a subset to more subsets Restore finishing settings for subsets [Split finishing] Use the finishing properties of original subsets Property Job setting What you can define Job type [Job type] • Normal • Variable data Job instruction [Note for operator] Instruction from sender Job name [Job name] New name for the job Number of sets [Number of sets] • Number of sets (maximum 65,000) • Check first set: print only the first set of the job Print range [Print range] Range of pages in a job Separator sheets [Separator sheets] Use of special media to distinguish individual sets Use of extra sheets to distinguish individual sets in the printed output. The media that are used for separator sheets are configured in the Settings Editor. Accounting information [Account ID] ID to identify a user or a group of users. General job settings 384 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Copy job settings Copy job settings The following tables show the copy job properties you can change. Original settings Property Job setting What you can define Original type [1- or 2-sided] Copy one or two sides of the original Binding edge [Original type] Binding position along the long or short side The binding edge automatically adjusts the margin shift direction, the orientation and staple position. Original size [Size] Standard or custom sizes of originals Background [Background] Suppression of vague or yellowish background Property Job setting What you can define Printing sides [1- or 2-sided] Print on one or two sides of the sheet Binding edge [Binding edge] The required orientation and binding location of the printed sheets. The chosen layout of the document automatically sets the default orientation and binding edge. Media [Media] Selection of media for the job Layout settings imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 4 385 Copy job settings Property Job setting What you can define Covers [Cover] The covers to the printed document and if they need to be printed: • Front and back cover • Print on the cover or not • Media for the cover Booklet, multiple pages per sheet [Layout] Print more than one page of a document on a single side of the sheet. Indicate how you want to print pages on the sheets: • Booklet printing, to print a multipage document as booklet. The pages are laid out two per sheet. When the two-sided sheets are collated, folded, and stapled, the result is a single book with the correct page order. • Multiple-up printing, to print more than one different pages together on a single sheet side. • Same-up printing, to print the same page more than once on a single sheet side. Scale images [Zoom] A manual or automatic adjustment of the scaling factor: • Automatic zoom according to set copy size • Manual zoom from 25% - 400% (Zoom function on page 409) Image alignment to specific position [Align] Indicate if the page images must be moved to corners, edges, or the middle of a sheet. This provides extra space for margins, punch holes, or a binding method. Image shift to exact position [Shift] Indicate if the page images must be shifted on the front and / or back of the sheet. You can shift the image horizontally and vertically. Margin erase [Margin erase] Margin erase for one or more page edges with a maximum of 100 mm / 3.94" Property Job setting What you can define Output location [Print delivery] -> [Output location] Selection of the output location The selected finishing method can require a specific output location. Sorting method [Print delivery] -> [Sort] Sorting by page or by sets Offset stacking [Print delivery] -> [Offset stacking] Stack method with or without an offset Offset stacking depends on the active workflow profile. (Choose a workflow profile on page 68) Delivery settings 386 Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Copy job settings Property Job setting What you can define Advanced settings [Print delivery] -> [Advanced settings] The delivery method of the sheets in the output location of your choice: • Delivery order of the sheets • Delivery position of the sheets • Delivery with rotated sheets Apply these settings for one or more finishing optionals. Print quality settings Property Job setting What you can define Adjust image [Adjust image] Adjustments in brightness, contrast and color settings Color quality [Color / black & white] Copy in color or black & white, or choose automatic detection Job setting What you can define Finishing settings Property Binding of printed sets [Binding] Stapling and saddle-stitch settings Folding method or creasing [Folding] [Creasing] How to fold the printed documents The professional puncher supports punching and creasing. Make sure the die set for creasing is placed. Trimming method [Trimming] How to trim the printed documents Punching [Punching] Punching setting Property Job setting What you can define Job name [Job name] New name for the job Number of sets [Number of sets] • Number of sets (maximum 65,000) • Check first set: print only the first set of the job Print queue [Destination] Destination of the copy job: list of waiting jobs, scheduled jobs or a DocBox Separator sheets [Separator sheets] Use of special media to distinguish individual sets General job settings imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 387 Scan job settings Scan job settings The following tables show the scan job properties you can change. Original settings Property Job setting What you can define Original type [1- or 2-sided] Scan one or two sides of the original Binding edge [Original type] Binding position along the long or short side The binding edge automatically adjusts the margin shift direction, the orientation and staple position. Original size [Size] Standard or custom sizes of originals Background [Background] Suppression of vague or yellowish background Property Job setting What you can define File type [Type] • Format of the scan file • Compression factor • Quality factor for JPG and PDF scan files Document settings The compression factor determines the size of the scan file. 388 Page size [Size] Page size of the digital document Resolution [Resolution] Scan resolution Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Scan job settings Layout settings Property Job setting What you can define Scale images [Zoom] A manual or automatic adjustment of the scaling factor: • Automatic zoom according to the digital document size • Manual zoom from 25% - 400% Image alignment to specific position [Align] Indicate if the page images must be moved to corners, edges, or the middle of a sheet. This provides extra space for margins, punch holes, or a binding method. Margin erase [Margin erase] Margin erase for one or more page edges with a maximum of 100 mm / 3.94" Property Job setting What you can define Adjust image [Adjust image] Adjustments in brightness, contrast and color settings You can see the results in a preview. Color quality [Color / black & white] • Color depth selection: color, black & white or gray scale • Selection of color profile Property Job setting What you can define Destination [Destination] The available destinations depend on the configuration of the scan function: • FTP • USB • Email • SMB • DocBox • List of waiting jobs Job name [Job name] New name for the job File ID [Enter file ID] Numeric value that is part of file name Image/Quality settings Destination settings imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 389 Status indicators Status indicators Job status indicators The job lists have icons to indicate the job status. Icon Description The printer receives the job via the network (spooling). The printer must still convert the job into a raster image (raster image processing). The printer converts the job into a raster image (raster image processing). The printer prints a job. The printer is ready to print the job. The printer converts and prints the job simultaneously. The printer has only printed a part of the number of sets. The job contains a note for the print operator. The job is a variable data printing job. The job is a streaming job. The job is a proof print. The job is a bundled job. The settings of the job can cause a conflict. Check the job settings to resume the print process. The job causes a raster image processing error. 390 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Paper tray indicators Paper tray indicators The control panel shows the following icons to indicate the status of the paper trays. Icon Description The paper tray holds media. The paper tray is empty. The paper tray is empty and a print job uses this paper tray. The paper tray is open. The paper tray contains too much media. Remove sheets from the stack to resume the print production. The external paper input module is not ready due to an empty paper tray, paper jam, or another reason. The paper tray contains media that the print system feeds in long-edge direction. The paper tray contains media, for example A4R / LTRR, that the print system feeds in short-edge direction. The paper tray is in use for the print production. The paper guides are set incorrectly. The paper tray contains tab sheets. The paper tray of the inserter contains tab sheets as insert sheets. The paper tray of the inserter contains insert sheets. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 391 Media indicators Media indicators Media is displayed on several locations of the control panel. Extra information about the media is displayed by icons. Icon Description The media is required for a job in the list of scheduled jobs or list of waiting jobs. The media family of the media needs a media family calibration. The media is loaded into a paper tray. The media is used in a scheduled job and loaded into a paper tray. The warning icon indicates that the media definition needs attention. Check if all important attributes are defined. 392 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Media specifications Media specifications Supported media types per paper input option Media type Thin (52 g/m² - 79 g/m²) (14 lb bond - 22 lb bond) Internal paper tray Special feeder Bulk paper module Paper module Inserter *6 Plain (80 g/m² - 105 g/m²) (20 lb bond - 28 lb bond) Heavy (106 g/m² - 300 g/m²) (28 lb bond - 110 lb cover) 1-Sided coated (106 g/m² - 300 g/m²) (28 lb bond - 110 lb cover) 2-Sided coated (106 g/m² - 300 g/m²) (28 lb bond - 110 lb cover) Matte coated (106 g/m² - 300 g/m²) (28 lb bond - 110 lb cover) Textured (80 g/m² - 300 g/m²) (22 lb bond - 110 lb cover) Vellum (64 g/m² - 105 g/m²) (17 lb bond - 28 lb cover) *1 Transparency (151 g/m² - 180 g/m²) (40 lb bond - 66 lb cover) *2 *6 Recycled (64 g/m² - 105 g/m²) (17 lb cover - 28 lb cover) Color (64 g/m² - 90 g/m²) (17 lb cover - 24 lb cover) Prepunched (64 g/m² - 90 g/m²) (17 lb cover - 24 lb cover) imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 15 - References 393 Supported media types per paper input option Media type Tab paper (151 g/m² - 220 g/m²) (40 lb cover - 81 lb cover) Labels (151 g/m² - 180 g/m²) (40 lb cover - 66 lb cover) Internal paper tray Special feeder *3 *6 Bulk paper module Paper module - Inserter - Bond (64 g/m² - 105 g/m²) (17 lb cover - 28 lb cover) Letterhead (151 g/m² - 180 g/m²) (40 lb cover - 66 lb cover) Carbonless (52 g/m² - 63 g/m²) (14 lb cover - 17 lb cover) Envelope *4 *5 *7 *1 Some types of vellums are not supported. *2 Use only recommended A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR transparencies. *3 Use with Tab feeding attachment Tab Feeding Attachment-F1. *4 Use with Envelope Feeder Attachment-F1 except for ISO-C5 and Kakugata 2. *5 Use with Envelope Feeder Attachment-G1. *6 Long sheets are not supported for thin media (52 g/m² - 63 g/m²) / (14 lb bond - 17 lb bond), transparencies, and tab paper. *7 Use only ISO-C5 394 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Supported media sizes per paper input option Supported media sizes per paper input option Media size Internal paper tray Special feeder Bulk paper module Paper module Inserter *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 330 mm x 483 mm 13" x 19" 305 mm x 457 mm 12" x 18" SRA3 320 mm x 450 mm 12.6 " x 17.7" A3 / 11" x 17" 297 mm x 420 mm 11.7" x 16.5" A4 / LTR 297 mm x 210 mm 11.7" x 8.3" A4R / LTRR 210 mm x 297 mm 8.3" x 11.7" A5R / STMTR 148 mm x 210 mm 5.8" x 8.3" Custom sizes *6 *1 Custom sizes for internal paper tray: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" *2 Custom sizes for special feeder: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" *2 Custom sizes for special feeder when Long Sheet Tray-B1 is attached for long sheets: 210 mm x 487.8 mm - 330.2 mm x 762 mm / 8.3" x 19.2" - 13" x 30" *2 Custom sizes for special feeder / output tray and enabled by your service organization: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 762 mm / 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 30" *3 Custom sizes for bulk paper module: 139.7 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 5 1/2" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" *4 Custom sizes for paper module: 139. 7 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 5 1/2" x 7.2" - 13" x 19.2" *5 Custom sizes for inserter: 182 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 x 487.7 mm / 7.2" x 7.2" - 13" x 19.2" imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 395 Supported envelope types per paper input option Supported envelope types per paper input option Media size Internal paper tray Special feeder Bulk paper module Paper module ISO-C5 162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9" Inserter - No. 10 (COM10) 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 ½" - - Monarch 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8" x 7 ½" - - DL 110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3" - - Nagagata 3 120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4" - - Yougatanaga 3 120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4" - - Kakugata 2 240 mm x 332 mm / 9 1/2" x 13" - - - - Custom size *1 *2 *3 *1 Custom size internal paper tray: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" *2 Custom size special feeder: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" *3 Custom size bulk paper module: 139.7 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 5 1/2" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" 396 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Feed direction Feed direction Feed direction for stapling Use the automatic document feeder The following table shows the orientation of originals in relation to the required staple position. Staple position A4 / LTR Orientation A3 / 11"x 17" Staple setting Orientation Staple setting [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Bottom left] [1 staple] [Top right] [2 staples] [Left edge] [2 staples] [Left edge] [1 staple] [Bottom left] [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Top right] [2 staples] [Left edge] [2 staples] [Right edge] 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 397 Feed direction for stapling Staple position A4 / LTR Orientation A3 / 11"x 17" Staple setting Orientation Staple setting [2 staples] [Left edge] [2 staples] [Right edge] [1 staple] [Top right] [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Bottom right] [2 staples] [Right edge] [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Top right] [1 staple] [Bottom right] [2 staples] [Right edge] [Saddle stitching] 398 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Feed direction for stapling Use the glass plate The following table shows the orientation of originals in relation to the required staple position. Staple position A4 / LTR Orientation A3 / 11"x 17" Staple setting Orientation Staple setting [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Bottom left] [1 staple] [Top right] [2 staples] [Left edge] [2 staples] [Left edge] [1 staple] [Bottom left] [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Top right] [2 staples] [Left edge] [2 staples] [Right edge] [2 staples] [Left edge] [2 staples] [Right edge] 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 399 Feed direction for stapling Staple position A4 / LTR Orientation A3 / 11"x 17" Staple setting Orientation Staple setting [1 staple] [Top right] [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Bottom right] [2 staples] [Right edge] [1 staple] [Top left] [1 staple] [Top right] [1 staple] [Bottom right] [2 staples] [Right edge] [Saddle stitching] 400 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Feed direction for punching Feed direction for punching The following table shows the orientation of originals in relation to the position of punch holes. Glass plate Automatic document feeder * * * * * Position of the holes in the output. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 401 Feed direction for folding Feed direction for folding [Z-fold] The [Z-fold] option folds A3 / 11" x 17" or A4R / LTRR paper into A4 / LTR or A5 / SMT size, respectively. Orientation for the [Z-fold] option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder *1 *2 [196] Leading-edge length (1) and feed direction (2) NOTE Calculate sum of the formula: X + 2Y +10Z Where: X = the number of A4 sheets which are not Z-folded Y = the number of A3 sheets which are not Z-folded Z = the number of Z-folded sheets When the sum of the formula is more than 100, stapling is not possible. Example 1: 50 A4 sheets + 4 A3 sheets + 1 A3 Z-folded sheet = 68 -> stapling is possible Example 2: 50 A4 sheets + 7 A3 Z-folded sheets = 120 -> stapling is not possible [Half-fold] Orientation for the [Half-fold] option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder *1 *2 [197] Leading-edge length (1) and feed direction (2) [Tri-fold in] The [Tri-fold in] option folds paper to make it suitable for envelopes. The paper gets the shape of a C. 402 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Feed direction for folding Orientation for the [Tri-fold in] option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder *1 *2 [198] Leading-edge length (1) and feed direction (2) [Tri-fold out] The [Tri-fold out] option folds paper to make it suitable for envelopes. The paper is folded in the shape of a Z. Orientation for the [Tri-fold out] option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder *1 *2 [199] Leading-edge length (1) and feed direction (2) [Parallel fold] The [Parallel fold] option folds the paper in four equal parts. Orientation for the [Parallel fold] option Folded output Glass plate Automatic document feeder *1 *2 [200] Leading-edge length (1) and feed direction (2) imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 403 Feed direction for the inserter Feed direction for the inserter Stapling The following table shows how to feed insert sheets in relation to the staple position. Staple position A4 / LTR A3 / 11"x 17" Orientation Orientation 4 404 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Feed direction for the inserter Staple position imagePRESS C850 Series A4 / LTR A3 / 11"x 17" Orientation Orientation Chapter 15 - References 405 Feed instruction for envelopes Feed instruction for envelopes The following tables show how to feed the envelopes in the paper trays. Internal paper tray Use with Envelope Feeder Attachment-F1. Internal paper tray [201] Nagagata 3, Kakugata 2 [202] Nagagata 3, Kakugata 2, to prevent creased envelopes [203] No. 10 (COM10), ISO-C5, DL, Monarch, Yougata- [204] No. 10 (COM10), ISO-C5, DL, Monarch, Yougata- naga 3 naga 3, to prevent creased envelopes Bulk paper module Use with Envelope Feeder Attachment-G1. Some types of Yougatanaga 3 do not need the Envelope Feeder Attachment-G1. This depends on the manufacturer of the envelopes. Use the support tray of the Envelope Feeder Attachment-G1 for Kakugata 2. Bulk paper module [205] Nagagata 3, Kakugata 2 [206] No. 10 (COM10), ISO-C5, DL, Monarch, Yougatanaga 3 The following table shows the loading limits in the bulk paper tray. 406 Envelope type Loading limit Loading limit mark Nagagata 3 160 mm / 6.3" Not applicable Nagagata 3, side seam envelope 100 mm / 3.9" Yougatanaga 3 100 mm / 3.9" Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Feed instruction for envelopes Envelope type Loading limit Kakugata 2 100 mm / 3.9" Kakugata 2, side-seam envelope 45 mm / 1.8" 228 mm x 304 mm / 9" x 12" 100 mm / 3.9" Loading limit mark Not applicable 152 mm x 228 mm / 6" x 9" No. 10 (COM10) ISO-C5 DL Monarch 70 mm / 2.8" Special feeder Special feeder [207] Nagagata 3, Kakugata 2 [208] Nagagata 3 or Kakugata 2, to prevent creased envelopes [209] No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, Yougata- [210] No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, Yougata- naga 3 naga 3, to prevent creased envelopes imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 407 Feed instruction for tab paper Feed instruction for tab paper 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 [211] Forward-order tab paper and reverse-order tab paper The following table shows the orientation of tab paper in the paper trays. Orientation Orientation and paper input optional Load the reverse-order tab paper face down, with the tabs at the left-hand side of the tray in: • Internal paper trays of the print module • Inserter 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 408 Chapter 15 - References Load forward-order tab paper face up, with the tabs at the right-hand side of the in tray: • Paper module • Bulk paper module • Special feeder imagePRESS C850 Series Zoom function Zoom function When you start a copy job or scan job, you can use the zoom function to reduce or enlarge an image. The print system automatically scales the image according to the size of the page. To change the zoom factor manually, you can use the + and - buttons of the zoom function. When you have originals with a custom paper size, you can use the glass plate. The zoom function of the automatic document feeder works differently from the zoom function of the glass plate. The zoom function in the automatic document feeder The following table shows the zoom of the automatic document feeder Illustration Description The center of the original is the origin of the image. Result of a scan with 100% zoom factor. Result of a scan with 50% zoom factor. Result of a scan with 200% zoom factor. The zoom function of the glass plate The following table shows the zoom of the glass plate. Illustration Description The upper left-hand corner of the glass plate is the origin of the image. Result of a scan with 100% zoom factor. Result of a scan with 50% zoom factor. Result of a scan with a 200% zoom factor. imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 409 More PRISMAsync color information More PRISMAsync color information Input and output profiles Input and output profiles define the transition from input colors, for example, the RGB color values of a photo, towards output colors or, for example, the CMYK color values of your printer. The color management of PRISMAsync transforms the color input space to the color output space via the standards of the ICC, the International Color Consortium. PRISMAsync comes with high quality color output profiles for both coated and uncoated media. PRISMAsync links output profiles to media via media families. Each media family has three different output profiles for the halftone screens Normal, Fine and Error-diffusion. Rendering intents A color gamut is a set of colors a system can produce. Input colors do not always fit in the color gamut of an output device. For colors that exceed the gamut of an output device, color space rendering intents are used for gamut mapping. The rendering intent tells the color management system how to handle colors that do not fit into the destination color gamut. The following rendering intents are available on PRISMAsync: • Relative colorimetric Frequently used and suitable for proofing applications on reference paper. White point compensation is applied. The white point of the output color space is the color of the used media. • Absolute colorimetric Mainly suitable for proofing applications on bright white paper. No black and white point compensation is applied, so the precise input paper color is simulated on the used media. • Perceptual Mainly suitable for photographic input. The colors are mapped in a continuous way and color nuances are recognized. White and black point compensation is applied. • Saturation Mainly suitable to obtain highly saturated colors and business graphics. Out-of-gamut colors are mapped to more saturated colors. White and black point compensation is applied. Leave out separations You can use color mapping to indicate layers in the document that you want to leave out whilst printing. You can exclude layers for printing when you map the colors of these layers to a spot color with the value “None”. You can use leave out separations for the following document areas: • White separations • Cutting marks • Spot layers, that indicate a foil to be applied after the print process • Spot layers, that indicate a gold print 410 Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Specifications Specifications Overview of licenses The following licenses are available to increase the functionality and productivity of the print system. License Commercial name More information DocBox DocBox-G1 See DocBox on page 142 Page programming Page Programming-G1 See Page Programming on page 384 E-Schredding E-Shredding-G1 See Removal of printed jobs on page 148 Software protection Integrity Checker-G1 See Learn about user authentication on page 54 PCL6 for transaction printing PCL6 TP-G1 See Learn about the transaction printing workflow on page 47 IPDS for transaction printing IPDS-G1 See Learn about the transaction printing workflow on page 47 PDF support for IPDS PDF for IPDS-G1 See Learn about the transaction printing workflow on page 47 DPlink DP Link-G1 Enables integration with Xerox ©systems Advanced color management Advanced Color Management- See Advanced color manageG1 ment on page 45 Asian font sets Fontset Simplified Chinese-G1 Fontset Traditional ChineseG1 Fontset Japanese-G1 Fontset Korean-G1 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 411 Print system specifications Print system specifications Print module Specification Value Type Color printer Resolution 1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi Device memory (SDRAM) Standard: 3.5 GB Hard disk 1 TB (scanning) Warm-up time 31 seconds after power on Print speed imagePRESS C850: 85 ppm (A4, 80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) imagePRESS C750: 75 ppm (A4, 80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) imagePRESS C650: 65 ppm (A4, 80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) Copy / scan speed imagePRESS C850: 85 ipm (A4, 80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) imagePRESS C750: 75 ipm (A4, 80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) imagePRESS C650: 65 ipm (A4, 80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) First print out time 30 seconds or less (from list of waiting jobs) First copy out time 33 seconds or less (from glass plate) Power requirement 208 V AC, 60 Hz, 20 A Power consumption Maximum 4,060 W Dimensions (WxDxH) (to the glass plate) 1,530 mm x 934 mm x 1,424 mm / 60 1/4" x 36 3/4" x 56 1/8" (without control panel and operator attention light) Weight Approximately 316 kg / 696 lb PRISMAsync Print Server Specification Value Description Integrated high-performance PRISMAsync color print server for imagePRESS C850 Series Operating system Windows® 10 Processor Intel® Core™ Memory 8 GB SDRAM Hard disk 2 x 3.5" SATA II, 500 GB, 7200 RPM Interface Ethernet (10/100/1000 Base-T), TCP/IP (LPR /LPD, 9100 Socket, SMB), Static IP / Auto-IP (DHCP) Page Description Language Adobe® PostScript® 3 (3020), PDF 1.8 Extension level 3, PDF/X-1a: 2001, PDF/X-1a:2003, PDF/X-3:2002, PDF/X-3:2003, PDF/X-4, PDF/VT level 1, Optimized PostScript®, Optimized PDF, Adobe® PDF Print Engine 4.2, IPDS PDF, IPDS PCL , PPML/GA level 1 versions 1.5, 2.1 and 2.2 Protocols 412 Chapter 15 - References SNMP v1/v2c/v3, Host resources MIB, System group MIB II, Printer MIB, Job Monitor MIB 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Print system specifications Specification Value Security E-shredding, HTTPs, LDAP, SNMP v3, Integrity checker, WebDav for SMB hotfolders, Encrypted user passwords, User authentication Spot color libraries HKS K, HKS K 3000+, HKS N, HKS N 3000+, Pantone® Goe™ (Uncoated / Coated), Pantone® + solid (Uncoated / Coated) Pantone® + solid (Uncoated / Coated) Options DocBox license Page Programming license E-shredding license Software protection license (integrity checker) PCL6 for transaction printing license IPDS for transaction printing license PDF support for IPDS license DP Link support license Advanced Color Management license: • DeviceLink support • Color simulation support • Named colour profile support • Color mapping (leave out separations) • Color control and information bars Asian font sets licenses: Korean, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese Languages British English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Dutch, Finnish, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Portuguese, American English, Russian, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Korean Power requirement 100 V AC - 240 V AC, 10 A - 5 A , 50/60 Hz Dimensions (WxDxH) 200 mm x 430 mm x 420 mm / 7 7/8" x 16,9" x 16,5" Weight Approximately 18 kg / 39 lb imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 413 Paper input specifications Paper input specifications Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1 Specification Value Description Optional automatic document feeder and scanner for duplex scanning of 1- and 2-sided originals Scan resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Number of tones 256 Capacity 300 originals (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) Copy / scan speed 600 dpi color: 70 ipm (1-sided and 2-sided) Original paper size A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR Original paper weight 1-sided: 38 - 220 g/m² / 10 lb bond - 81 lb cover 2-sided black & white: 50 - 220 g/m² / 13 lb bond - 81 lb cover 2-sided color: 64 - 220 g/m² / 17 lb bond - 81 lb cover Detection Automatic paper size detection Power requirement From main unit Dimensions unit (WxDxH) 633 mm x 603 mm x 179 mm / 24 7/8" x 23 3/4" x 7 1/8" Weight Approximately 26.9 kg / 59.3 lb Printer Cover-H1 Specification Value Description Cover for print-only system Long Sheet Tray-B1 414 Specification Value Description Optional special feeder to feed long sheets Print resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Maximum paper capacity 1 sheet Paper size Custom sizes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 762 mm 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 30" 210 mm x 487.8 mm - 330.2 mm x 762 mm 8.3" x 19.2" - 13" x 30" Paper weight 64 - 300 g/m² / 17 lb bond - 110 lb cover Note Not available in combination with Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1. Dimensions unit (WxDxH) When Stack Bypass-B1 and Copy Tray-R2 are attached: 2,137 mm x 1,424 mm x 1,424 mm / 84 1/8" x 56" x 56" Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Paper input specifications Specification Value Weight Approximately 0.6 kg / 1.3 lb Tab Feeding Attachment-F1 Specification Value Description Tab paper guide to guide tab paper in the internal paper tray Maximum paper capacity 60 mm / 2.36" or 300 - 400 sheets Paper size A4 / LTR Weight Approximately 0.1 kg / 0.22 lb Envelope Feeder Attachment-F1 Specification Value Description Envelope guide to guide envelopes in the internal paper tray Supported envelopes Envelope types: No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, DL, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3 Custom size envelopes: 152.4 mm x 228.6 mm / 6" x 9" Maximum capacity 50 sheets Weight Approximately 30 g / 0.066 lb Envelope Feeder Attachment-G1 Specification Value Description Envelope guide to guide envelopes in the bulk paper module (POD Deck Lite-C1) Supported envelopes Envelope types: ISO-C5, No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, DL, Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, Kakugata 2 Custom size envelopes: 152.4 mm x 228.6 mm, 228.6 mm x 304.8 mm / 6" x 9", 9" x 12" Maximum capacity Nagagata 3: 160 mm / 6.3" Nagagata 3 side seam envelope: 100 mm / 3.94" ISO-C5, No. 10 (COM10), DL, Yougatanaga 3, Kakugata 2: 100 mm / 3.94" Kakugata 2 side seam envelope: 45 mm / 1.77" Monarch: 70 mm / 2.76" Weight Approximately 1.5 kg / 3.307 lb Stack Bypass-B1 Specification Value Description Special feeder to feed special media manually imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 4 415 Paper input specifications Specification Value Maximum paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) Paper size Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 762 mm 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 30" Custom sizes when stacker/stapler is attached: 100 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 mm x 762 mm 3.9" x 7.2" - 13" x 30" Envelope types: ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9"), No. 10 (COM) (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 1/2"), Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8" x 7 1/2"), DL (110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3"), Nagagata 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Yougatanaga 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Kakugata 2 (240 mm x 332 mm / 9 1/2" x 13") Custom size envelopes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Custom size envelopes when stacker / stapler is attached: 100 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm 3.9" x 7.2" - 13" x 19.2" Paper weight 64 - 256 g/m² / 17 lb bond - 95 lb cover Notes • Feed coated paper one sheet at a time. • Not available in combination with Multi-drawer Paper Deck-B1. Internal paper trays 416 Specification Value Capacity 3 x 500 sheets(80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) Paper sizes Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes, including envelopes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Envelopes: ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9"), No. 10 (COM) (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 1/2"), Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8" x 7 1/2"), DL (110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3"), Nagagata 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Yougatanaga 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Kakugata 2 (240 mm 332 mm / 9 1/2" x 13") Paper weight 52 - 220 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 81 lb cover Paper feed technology • Suction feed • Air separation Features • Paper-level detection (visual) • Automatic tray opening • Double-sheet detection Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Paper input specifications Multi-drawer Paper Deck-C1 Specification Value Description Optional 3-tray paper input module Paper trays 3 x 2,000 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) Maximum paper capacity 6,000 sheets Paper sizes Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes, including envelopes: 139.7 mm x 148 mm - 330.2mm x 487.7 mm / 5 1/2" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Envelopes: ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9") Paper weight 52 - 300 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 110 lb cover Features Paper-level indication (visual), Automatic tray opening Power requirement 120 - 127 V AC, 60 Hz, 3.1 A Power consumption Maximum 880 W Dimensions unit (WxDxH) 950 mm x 797 mm x 1,040 mm 37 3/8" x 31 3/8" x 41" Weight unit Approximately 155 kg / 342 lb POD Deck Lite-C1 Specification Value Description Optional single-tray bulk paper module Paper trays 1 x 3,500 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) 1 x 4,000 sheets (64 g/m² / 17 lb bond) Paper size Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes, including envelopes: 139.7 mm x 182 mm - 330.2mm x 487.7 mm / 5 1/2" x 7.2" - 13" x 19.2" Envelope types: ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9"), No. 10 (COM) (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 1/2"), Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8" x 7 1/2"), DL (110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3"), Nagagata 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Yougatanaga 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Kakugata 2 (240 mm 332 mm / 9 1/2" x 13") Paper weight 52 - 300 g/m² / 16 lb bond - 110 lb cover Paper feed technology • Friction feed • Air separation Features Automatic tray opening Power requirement 120-127 V AC, 60 Hz, 2.2 A imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 15 - References 417 Paper input specifications Specification Value Power consumption Maximum 480 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 717 mm x 686 mm x 574 mm / 28 1/4" x 27" x 22.6" Weight Approximately 76 kg / 168 lb Document Insertion Unit-N1 418 Specification Value Description Optional sheet and cover insertion unit Capacity 2 x 200 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) Paper size Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes: 182 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 x 487.7 mm 7.2" x 7.2" - 13" x 19.2" Paper weight 52 - 300 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 110 lb cover Media For inserts: thin paper (52 - 63 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 16 lb bond), plain paper (64 - 105 g/m² / 17 lb bond - 28 lb bond), recycled paper, heavy paper (106 - 300 g/m² / 29 lb bond - 110 lb cover), coated paper (106 - 300 g/m² / 29 lb bond - 110 lb cover), colored paper, tabs, textured paper, bond paper, prepunched paper, letterhead, tracing paper Pass-through mode: all media as supported by the main engine Power requirement 100-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 1.0 A Power consumption Maximum 120 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 746 mm x 793 mm x 1,407 mm / 29 3/8" x 31 1/4" x 55 3/8" Weight Approximately 61 kg / 134 lb Chapter 15 - References imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Finishing and delivery specifications For specifications of the Perfect Binder-E1, Booklet Trimmer-F1, Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 and High Capacity Stacker-H1, refer to the manuals delivered together with these optionals. Copy Tray-R2 Specification Value Description Output tray to collect printed output Capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m² / 20 lb bond) Paper size Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Envelope types: ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9"), No. 10 (COM) (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 1/2"), Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8" x 7 1/2"), DL (110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3"), Nagagata 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Yougatanaga (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Kakugata 2 (240 mm 332 mm / 9 1/2" x 13") Paper weight 52 - 300 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 110 lb cover Dimensions (WxDxH) 422 mm x 382 mm x 175 mm / 16 5/8" x 15" x 6 7/8" Weight Approximately 1.2 kg / 2.6 lb Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1 Specification Value Description Unit with replaceable dies. Different punch dies enable plastic comb, twin loop-, etc. . The crease die creases printed sheets in the middle. Paper size for punching EU short-edge feed: A4, A3, SRA4, SRA3 EU long-edge feed: A4, A5, A4 tabs, A5 tabs US short-edge feed: LTR, Legal, 11" x 17", 9" x 12" , 12" x 18" US long-edge feed: LTR, 8 ½" x 5 ½", LTR tabs, 8 ½" x 5 ½" tabs Paper size for creasing EU short-edge feed: A4, A3, SRA3 US short-edge feed: LTR, Legal, 11" x 17", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 19.2", 13" x 19", 13" x 19.2" Paper weight Uncoated paper: 75 - 300 g/m² / 20 lb bond - 110 lb cover Coated paper: 120 - 300 g/m² / 32 lb bond - 110 lb cover Tab paper: 160 g/m² - 300 g/m² / 16 lb bond - 110 lb cover imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 4 419 Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Replaceable A4 / LTR dies EUR: 21-hole square Plastic Comb, 34-hole square Twin Loop, 23hole square Twin Loop, 34-hole round Twin Loop, 23-hole round Twin Loop, 47-hole round Color Coil, 12-hole round Velo Bind, 4hole round 8 mm Loose Leaf, 4-hole round 6.5 mm Loose Leaf, 4hole round Loose Leaf (Swedish), crease die US: 19-hole square Plastic Comb, 32-hole square Twin Loop, 21hole square Twin Loop, 32-hole round Twin Loop, 21-hole round Twin Loop, 44-hole round Color Coil, 11-hole round Velo Bind, 3hole round Loose Leaf, 3 / 5 / 7-hole round Loose Leaf, crease die Power requirement 115 V AC, 60 Hz, 3.8 A Power consumption Maximum 550 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 795 mm x 445 mm x 1,040 mm / 31 1/4" x 17 1/2" x 41" Weight Approximately 102 kg / 225 lb Paper Folding Unit-J1 Specification Value Description Optional fold unit with various folding options: tri-fold in, tri-fold out, parallel fold, z-fold, half-fold Tray capacity Folding unit output tray: • Parallel fold: 20 sheets Stacker/stapler upper and lower tray: • Z-fold/half fold.(A3, B4R, 11" x 17"): 30 sheets • Z-fold/half fold.(A4R, LTRR, LGLR): 10 sheets Stacker/stapler booklet tray: • Z-fold/half fold: 10 sheets Paper weight 52 - 105 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 28 lb bond Parallel fold: 52 - 90 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 24 lb bond Paper size Z-fold: A4R, B4R, A3, LTRR, LGL, 11" x 17" (279.4 x 431.8 mm ) Tri-fold in: A4R, LTRR Parallel fold: A4R, LTRR Double parallel fold: A4R, LTRR, LGL Half-fold: A4R, LTRR Power requirement From Staple Finisher-W1 PRO or Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO Power consumption Maximum 150 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 336 mm x 793 mm x 1,190mm / 13 1/4" x 31 1/4" x 46 7/8" Weight Approximately 71 kg / 157 lb Staple Finisher-W1 PRO 420 Specification Value Description Stacker / stapler with (offset) stacking, stapling, punching, folding, and staple-cut for thin sets Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Paper size for stacking Location: lower tray, upper tray, booklet tray Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes - upper tray: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.4" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Custom sizes - lower tray: 182 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 7.2" x 7.2" - 13" x 19.2" Custom sizes - booklet tray: 210 mm x 279.4 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 8.3" x 11" - 13" x 19.2" Paper size for stapling Location: lower tray Default sizes: A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR Custom sizes 1 staple: 210 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 8.3" x 7.2" - 11.7 x 17" Custom sizes 2 staples: 182 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 7.2" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" Paper size for punching Location: lower tray and upper tray Puncher Unit-BT1 2 holes: Default sizes: A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR Custom sizes: 182 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 7.2" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Puncher Unit-BT1 4 holes: Default sizes: A3, A4 / 11"x 17", LTR Custom sizes: 257 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 10.1" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Puncher Unit-BS1 2 holes: Default sizes: LTRR, Legal Custom sizes: 257 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 10.1" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Puncher Unit-BS1 3 holes: Default sizes: Letter, Executive, 11" x 17" Custom sizes: 257 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 10.1" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Paper weight 60 - 325 g/m² / 16 lb bond - 120 lb cover imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 15 - References 421 Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Stacking capacity for stacking Upper tray: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR : 1,000 sheets or 147 mm / 5.79" Lower tray: A4: 2,000 sheets or 285 mm / 11.22" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 1,000 sheets or 147 mm / 5.79" Upper tray + lower tray, when high-volume stacking is on: A4: 4,000 sheets or 490 mm / 19.29" A4R / LTRR: 2,000 sheets or 285 mm / 11.22": A3 / 11" x 17": 1,500 sheets or 216 mm / 8.5" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3 / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7": 1,000 sheets or 147 mm / 5.79" Stacking capacity for stapling Location: lower tray A4 / LTR: 3,000 sheets / 200 sets or 423 mm / 16.65" A4R / LTRR: 2,000 sheets / 200 sets or 285 mm / 11.22" A3: 1,500 sheets / 200 sets or 216 mm / 8.5" Maximum stapling capacity A4, LTR: 100 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) or below 11 mm / 0.43" A3, A4R, 11" x 17", LTRR: 50 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) or below 5.5 mm / 0.22" Stacking capacity for folding Location: upper tray, lower tray Z-fold: 30 sheets or 10 sheets per set Half-fold: 50 sheets Features Corner stapling, two-point stapling Staple-cut function depends on thickness set Power requirement 120-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 8 A Power consumption Maximum 500 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 800 mm x 792 mm x1,239 mm / 31 1/2" x 31 1/4" x 48 3/4" Weight Approximately 130 kg / 287 lb Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO 422 Specification Value Description Stacker / stapler extended with saddle-stitch and saddle-press functionality Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Paper size for stacking Location: lower tray, upper tray, booklet tray Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, STMTR 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes - upper tray: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.4" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Custom sizes - lower tray: 182 mm x 182 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 7.2" x 7.2" - 13" x 19.2" Custom sizes - booklet tray: 210 mm x 279.4 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 8.3" x 11" - 13" x 19.2" Paper size for stapling Location: lower tray Default sizes: A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR Custom sizes 1 staple: 210 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 8.3" x 7.2" - 11.7 x 17" Custom sizes 2 staples: 182 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 7.2" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" Paper size for punching Location: lower tray, upper tray Puncher Unit-BT1 2 holes: Default sizes: A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR Custom sizes: 182 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 7.2" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Puncher Unit-BT1 4 holes: Default sizes: A3, A4 / 11"x 17", LTR Custom sizes: 257 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 10.1" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Puncher Unit-BS1 2 holes: Default sizes: LTRR, Legal Custom sizes: 257 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 10.1" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Puncher Unit-BS1 3 holes: Default sizes: Letter, Executive, 11" x 17" Custom sizes: 257 mm x 182 mm - 297 mm x 432 mm / 10.1" x 7.2" - 11.7" x 17" 297.1 mm x 182 mm - 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm / 11.7" x 7.2" - 12" x 18" Paper weight Booklet pages: 60 - 220 g/m² / 16 lb bond - 82 lb cover Booklet cover: 64 - 300 g/m² / 17 lb bond - 110 lb cover imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 4 423 Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Stacking capacity for stacking Upper tray: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR : 1,000 sheets or 147 mm / 5.79" Lower tray: A4: 2,000 sheets or 285 mm / 11.22" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 1,000 sheets or 147 mm / 5.79" Upper + lower tray, when high-volume stacking is on: A4: 4,000 sheets or 490 mm / 19.29" A4R / LTRR: 2,000 sheets or 285 mm / 11.22": A3 / 11" x 17": 1,500 sheets or 216 mm / 8.5" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3 / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7": 1,000 sheets or 147 mm / 5.79" Stacking capacity for stapling Location: lower tray A4 / LTR: 3,000 sheets / 200 sets or 423 mm / 16.65" A4R / LTRR: 2,000 sheets / 200 sets or 285 mm / 11.22" A3: 1,500 sheets / 200 sets or 216 mm / 8.5" Maximum stapling capacity A4, LTR: 100 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) or below 11 mm / 0.43" A3, A4R, 11" x 17", LTRR: 50 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) or below 5.5 mm / 0.22" Saddle stitching: 25 sheets (100 pages) (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond). Stacking capacity for folding Location: upper tray, lower tray Z-fold: 30 sheets or 10 sheets per set Half-fold: 50 sheets Stacking capacity for booklets Location: booklet tray 30 booklets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) Unlimited stacking with external catch tray. Paper size for saddle stitch- Location: booklet tray ing and saddle folding 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTTR, Custom sizes: 210 mm x 279.3 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 8.3" x 11" - 13" x 19.2" 424 Features Saddle press functionality to increase the flatness of booklets Folding up to 5 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) per set Staple-cut function depends on thickness set Power requirement 120-127 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 8 A Power consumption Maximum 500 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 800 mm x 792 mm x 1,239 mm / 31 1/2" x 31 1/4" x 48 3/4" Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Weight Approximately 180 kg / 397 lb Punch hole distances of punch units for Staple Finisher-W1 PRO and Booklet Finisher-W1 PRO * * * * [212] Puncher Unit-BT1, * = 80 mm / 3 1/8" 2 3/4" (70 mm) 4 1/4" 4 1/4" (108 mm) (108 mm) [213] Puncher Unit-BS1 Staple Finisher-T1 Specification Value Description Stacker / stapler with (offset) stacking, stapling, folding and punching Paper size for stacking Location: lower tray, upper tray, top tray Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.4" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Envelope types: ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9"), No. 10 (COM) (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 1/2"), Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8" x 7 1/2"), DL (110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3"), Nagagata 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Yougatanaga 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Kakugata 2 (240 mm x 332 mm / 9 1/2" x 13") Custom size envelopes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Paper size for stapling Location: lower tray Default sizes: A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 15 - References 425 Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Paper size for punching Location: lower tray, upper tray External 2/3 Hole Puncher-C1: Letter, Executive, 11" x 17" Paper weight Top tray: 52 - 256 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 95 lb cover Lower and upper tray: 52 - 300 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 110 lb cover Stacking capacity for stacking Top tray: A4, A5R / LTR, STMTR: 250 sheets or 43 mm / 1.69" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 125 sheets or 21 mm / 0.83" Upper tray with offset stacked: A4 / LTR: 1,300 sheets or 188 mm / 7.4" A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Upper tray without offset stacked: A4, A5R / LTR STMR: 1,300 sheets or 188 mm / 7.4" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Lower tray with offset stacked: A4 / LTR: 1,700 sheets or 243 mm / 9.57" A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Lower tray without offset stacked: A4: 2,450 sheets or 347 mm / 13.66" A5R / STMTR: 1,700 sheets or 243 mm / 9.57" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" 426 Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Stacking capacity for stapling Location: upper tray, lower tray A4 / LTR: 1,300 sheets / 100 sets or 188 mm / 7.4" A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR,: 650 sheets / 50 sets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Maximum stapling capacity A4 / LTR: 50 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR: 30 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) The number of sheets vary, depending on the media type and weight. Features Corner stapling, two-point stapling Power consumption From main unit Maximum 385 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 644 mm x 656 mm x1,121 mm / 25.35" x 25.83" x 44.1" Weight Approximately 48 kg / 105 lb Booklet Finisher-T1 Specification Value Description Stacker / stapler extended with saddle-stitch functionality Paper size for stacking Location: lower tray, upper tray, top tray Default sizes: 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4, A4R, A5R 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7", 11" x 17", LTR, LTTR, STMTR Custom sizes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm / 3.4" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Envelope types: ISO-C5 (162 mm x 229 mm / 6 3/8" x 9"), No. 10 (COM) (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm / 4 1/8" x 9 1/2"), Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm / 3 7/8" x 7 1/2"), DL (110 mm x 220 mm / 4 1/3" x 8 2/3"), Nagagata 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Yougatanaga 3 (120 mm x 235 mm / 4.7" x 9 1/4"), Kakugata 2 (240 mm x 332 mm / 9 1/2" x 13") Custom size envelopes: 100 mm x 148 mm - 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm 3.9" x 5.8" - 13" x 19.2" Paper size for stacking Location: booklet tray Default sizes: 305 mm x 457 mm, A3 , A4R / 12" x 18", 11" x 17", LTTR Paper size for stapling Location: lower tray Default sizes: A3, A4, A4R / 11" x 17", LTR, LTRR imagePRESS C850 Series 4 Chapter 15 - References 427 Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Paper size for punching Location: lower tray, upper tray External 2/3 Hole Puncher-C1: Letter, Executive, 11" x 17" Paper weight Top tray: 52 - 256 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 95 lb cover Lower and upper tray: 52 - 300 g/m² / 14 lb bond - 110 lb cover Booklet tray : 60 - 256 g/m² / 16 lb bond - 95 lb cover Stacking capacity for stacking Top tray: A4, A5R / LTR, STMTR: 250 sheets or 43 mm / 1.69" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 125 sheets or 21 mm / 0.83" Upper tray with offset stacked: A4 / LTR: 1,300 sheets or 188 mm / 7.4" A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Upper tray without offset stacked: A4, A5R / LTR STMR: 1,300 sheets or 188 mm / 7.4" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Lower tray with offset stacked: A4 / LTR: 1,700 sheets or 243 mm / 9.57" A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Lower tray without offset stacked: A4: 2,450 sheets or 347 mm / 13.66" A5R / STMTR: 1,700 sheets or 243 mm / 9.57" 330 mm x 483 mm, 305 mm x 457 mm, SRA3, A3, A4R / 13" x 19", 12" x 18", 12.6" x 17.7" 11" x 17" LTTR: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" 428 Chapter 15 - References 4 imagePRESS C850 Series Finishing and delivery specifications Specification Value Stacking capacity for stapling Location: upper tray, lower tray A4 / LTR: 1,300 sheets / 100 sets or 188 mm / 7.4" A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR,: 650 sheets / 50 sets or 96 mm / 3.78" Different media sizes or lighter than 59 g/m² / 16 lb bond: 650 sheets or 96 mm / 3.78" Maximum stapling capacity A4 / LTR: 50 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) A3, A4R / 11" x 17", LTRR: 30 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) The number of sheets vary, depending on the media type and weight. Stacking capacity for booklets Location: booklet tray 1-5 sheets: 25 sets 6-10 sheets:: 15 sets 11-16 sheets: 10 sets Maximum saddle-stitching capacity 16 sheets (80 g/m² / 22 lb bond) Including 1 cover sheet of maximum 256 g/m² / 95 lb cover The number of sheets vary, depending on the media type and weight. Maximum saddle folding capacity 1 sheet (60 g/m² - 256 g/m² / 16 lb bond - 95 lb cover) Features Corner stapling, two-point stapling Saddle stitching Power consumption From main unit Maximum 385 W Dimensions (WxDxH) 646 mm x 656 mm x1,121 mm / 25.43" x 25.83" x 44.1" 800 mm x 792 mm x1,239 mm / 31 1/2" x 31 1/4" x 48 3/4" Weight Approximately 72 kg / 158 lb Punch hole distances of punch units for Staple Finisher-T1 and Booklet Finisher-T1 4 1/4" 4 1/4" (108 mm) (108 mm) 2 3/4" (70 mm) [214] External 2/3 Hole Puncher-C1 imagePRESS C850 Series Chapter 15 - References 429 Settings Editor specifications Settings Editor specifications 430 URL to access the Settings Editor http(s):// or http(s):// Recommended resolution of your computer screen Minimum 640 x 480 pixels Supported web browsers • • • • Language As defined in your browser, as long as the printer supports this language Chapter 15 - References Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 8 and higher Mozilla Firefox® 10 and higher Google Chrome™ 17 and higher Apple Safari® 6 and higher imagePRESS C850 Series Index Index ' 'All'.........................................................................354 'None'.................................................................... 354 1 1- or 2-sided configure originals......................................... 307 A Access rights...........................................................54 Account ID automated workflow......................................317 definition...........................................................71 print setting.................................................... 384 Accounting concept..............................................................71 mode selection................................................. 71 ACCT correction........................................................203 Registration...................................................... 73 Action required window........................................ 57 Advanced color management description........................................................ 45 license............................................................. 411 Alignment configure.........................................................275 Alignment tray special feeder................................................... 33 Asian font sets license............................................................. 411 Automated workflows description........................................................ 49 hotfolder........................................................... 49 LPR command.................................................. 49 variable data printing.....................................120 Automatic color mismatch.................................. 195 Automatic color tone correction correction........................................................203 registration....................................................... 73 Automatic document feeder cleaning...........................................................254 commercial name............................................ 25 feed instruction for half fold..........................402 feed instruction for parallel fold................... 403 imagePRESS C850 Series feed instruction for punching........................401 feed instruction for stapling.......................... 397 feed instruction for tri-fold in........................ 403 feed instruction for tri-fold out......................403 feed instruction for Z-fold..............................402 location............................................................. 24 parts.................................................................. 32 usage of.......................................................... 124 zoom function.................................................409 Automatic document feeder rollers.................... 257 Automatic gradation adjustment configure.........................................................328 description...................................................... 186 usage of.......................................................... 188 with custom media........................................ 205 Automatic gradation adjustment timer configure.........................................................328 Auxiliary booklet tray location (professional stacker / stapler)......... 35 location (standard stacker / stapler)............... 37 Auxiliary originals receiving tray.......................... 32 Auxiliary originals tray location............................................................. 32 usage of.......................................................... 124 Auxiliary tray output tray........................................................ 40 special feeder................................................... 33 B Back covers media.............................................................. 289 Background originals copy jobs.........................................................385 scan jobs......................................................... 388 Banner page..........................................................152 Banner pages enable..............................................................286 media...................................................... 286, 289 Beep sound........................................................... 266 Billing counters.....................................................223 Binding edge copy jobs.........................................................385 print setting.................................................... 380 Binding originals copy jobs.........................................................385 scan jobs......................................................... 388 431 Index Black and white print setting.................................................... 382 Black Point Compensation (BPC) configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 print setting.................................................... 382 Black preservation transaction printing................................361, 368 Booklet making options.............................................................. 78 Booklet trimmer commercial name............................................ 25 location............................................................. 25 Booklets copy jobs.........................................................385 print setting.................................................... 380 Bulk paper module commercial name............................................ 25 feed instruction of envelopes........................406 loading media into..................................... 97, 98 parts.................................................................. 30 specifications..................................................417 supported envelopes..................................... 396 supported media size.....................................395 supported media type....................................393 C Calibration configure.........................................................328 description...................................................... 186 perform media family calibration................. 190 perform printer calibration............................188 Central operator description........................................................ 55 login.................................................................. 62 Central operators....................................................54 Check first set copy jobs.........................................384, 386, 387 print setting.................................................... 381 usage of.......................................................... 167 workflow profile............................................... 69 Check-and-print workflow profile description........................................................ 69 Clean roller............................................................260 Cleaning tasks and procedures.....................................251 CMYK values adjust for media family..................................200 adjust for single jobs..................................... 164 Coated media productivity configure correction.......................................278 Code pages default value for transaction printing...........370 432 Color management.................................................... 44 Color / resolution priority configure default............................................ 330 Color bar automated workflow......................................316 configure.........................................................284 Color cast configure correction.......................................278 Color control bar advanced color management......................... 45 print setting.................................................... 382 Color depth scan jobs......................................................... 389 Color management calibration....................................................... 186 copy jobs.........................................................388 key operator......................................................44 perform media family calibration................. 190 perform printer calibration............................188 PRISMAsync..................................................... 44 scan jobs......................................................... 388 system administrator.......................................44 task splitting..................................................... 44 transaction printing................................361, 368 transaction printing mode...............................47 Color mapping configure.........................................................351 default value for transaction printing...........370 transaction printing........................................370 Color mapping group configure.........................................................351 Color mappings advanced color management......................... 45 Color or black & white transaction printing................................361, 368 Color or resolution priority print setting.................................................... 382 Color preset automated workflow......................................316 configure.........................................................335 configure name.............................................. 336 default............................................................. 335 description........................................................ 44 print settings...................................................382 printer driver...................................................114 PRISMAprepare..............................................116 Color preset for PRISMAprepare configure default............................................ 330 Color profile scan jobs......................................................... 389 Color quality copy jobs.........................................................387 print setting.................................................... 382 imagePRESS C850 Series Index scan jobs......................................................... 389 Color stations........................................................363 Color tones correction........................................................203 registration....................................................... 73 Composite output profiles................................... 343 Compression factor scan jobs......................................................... 388 Configuration file..................................................355 Consumables recommended media.....................................224 staple cartridges for saddle-stitch unit.........226 staple cartridges for staple unit.................... 226 toner cartridges.............................................. 224 waste toner container.................................... 225 Control panel access................................................................54 adjustment of readability................................ 65 cleaning...........................................................252 definition of trapping preset......................... 382 DocBox............................................................142 error recovery transaction print jobs..............48 finishing options.............................................. 78 image shift transaction print jobs...................48 job management on.........................................68 job names......................................................... 64 last-minute print settings.............................. 380 location............................................................. 24 media catalog................................................... 43 parts.................................................................. 50 pinch zoom gesture......................................... 67 schedule..........................................................178 temporary media..............................................76 transaction printing mode...............................48 Copy job description...................................................... 121 destination...................................................... 121 easy copy job..................................................121 templates........................................................ 121 Copy jobs combined copy job........................................ 131 last-minute settings....................................... 380 optimizing scan quality..................................376 page programming........................................ 131 settings............................................................385 start a copy job...............................................127 starting at automatic document feeder........124 starting at glass plate.....................................126 subsets............................................................ 131 Copy to.................................................................. 154 Corona assembly wires........................................259 Correction automatic color mismatch.............................195 curled output media.......................................217 imagePRESS C850 Series Cost center automated workflow......................................317 Counters................................................................ 223 Covers automated workflow......................................314 copy jobs.........................................................385 media...................................................... 288, 289 print setting.................................................... 380 Creasing automated workflow......................................315 copy jobs.........................................................387 print setting.................................................... 383 Creasing options.....................................................80 CropBox.................................................................302 Curled output media............................................ 217 Custom user group.................................................55 D Document printing......................................... 120 variable data printing.....................................120 Dashboard information....................................................... 51 Data objects transaction printing........................................370 Data resolution transaction printing........................................359 Default media family configure default............................................ 330 Default orientation transaction printing........................................365 Default output location Offset stacking...................................................... transaction printing................................359, 365 Default user accounts.......................................54, 55 Default user accounts login.................................................................. 62 Default user groups................................................54 Delay time buttons............................................... 266 Delivery order copy jobs.........................................................386 print setting.................................................... 381 Delivery orientation copy jobs.........................................................386 print setting.................................................... 381 Density configure.........................................................299 Density not within required range...................... 377 Destination copy jobs.................................................384, 387 scan jobs......................................................... 389 Device link profiles............................................... 343 Device Link support 433 Index advanced color management......................... 45 Device simulation advanced color management......................... 45 Die set lubrication.................................................263 DocBox automated workflow......................................317 combining jobs in.......................................... 144 configure settings.......................................... 311 copy jobs.........................................................121 description...................................................... 142 editing jobs in.................................................143 license............................................................. 411 locking jobs in................................................ 145 page programming........................................ 142 print job settings............................................ 380 printer driver...................................................114 printing jobs from.......................................... 146 PRISMAprepare..............................................116 scan jobs......................................................... 123 Document Insertion Unit-N1 parts.................................................................. 31 Document view.....................................................160 DP Link support license............................................................. 411 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1 parts.................................................................. 32 E E-shredding license............................................................. 411 list of printed jobs.......................................... 148 Easy copy job template.......................................................... 121 Easy copy mode configure.........................................................307 Easy scan mode configure.........................................................307 Edge enhancement configure.........................................................299 Edge enhancement for text print setting.................................................... 382 Embedded output profile ignore in transaction printing............... 361, 368 Empty pages transaction printing........................................365 Envelope guide specifications..................................................415 Envelopes checking and preparing before loading......... 88 overview of supported types.......................... 76 requirement before loading............................ 88 Error recovery transaction printing................................359, 363 434 Error recovery method external finisher settings............................... 292 Export transaction setup............................................356 External finisher default delivery settings................................ 292 name definition.............................................. 292 F Face direction Perfect Binder................................................. 297 stacker / stapler settings................................ 294 Face orientation automated workflow......................................315 external finisher settings............................... 292 high capacity stacker settings....................... 295 transaction printing................................359, 365 Feed edge external finisher settings............................... 292 high capacity stacker settings....................... 295 Perfect Binder................................................. 297 stacker / stapler settings................................ 294 Feeding originals automatic document feeder.......................... 124 File ID scan jobs......................................................... 389 File type scan jobs......................................................... 388 Finisher adjustments............................................275 Finishing options.............................................................. 78 Finishing and delivery specifications..................................................419 Fit to media automated workflow......................................313 Fixing belt configure correction.......................................278 refresh procedure...........................................262 Fixing pressure print clean procedure..............................................261 Folder commercial name............................................ 25 location............................................................. 25 parts.................................................................. 39 specifications..................................................420 Folding automated workflow......................................315 copy jobs.........................................................387 options.............................................................. 80 print setting.................................................... 383 Font default values for transaction printing......... 370 Font capture imagePRESS C850 Series Index Extend logical page.............................................. transaction printing........................................359 Font substitution configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 Fonts transaction printing........................................370 Format scan jobs......................................................... 388 Front covers media.............................................................. 288 G G7 output profiles use embedded profiler.................................. 214 use external tool.............................................213 G7 support configure.........................................................328 Glass plate cleaning...........................................................253 feed instruction for half fold..........................402 feed instruction for parallel fold................... 403 feed instruction for punching........................401 feed instruction for stapling.......................... 399 feed instruction for tri-fold in........................ 403 feed instruction for tri-fold out......................403 feed instruction for Z-fold..............................402 usage of.......................................................... 126 zoom function.................................................409 Gloss, uneven configure correction.......................................278 H Halftone configure default............................................ 299 transaction printing........................................361 Halftone for graphics configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 Halftone for images configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 Halftone for text configure color preset....................................336 Halftone for text/lines configure default............................................ 330 Halftones print settings...................................................382 Header orientation automated workflow......................................315 external finisher settings............................... 292 high capacity stacker settings....................... 295 Perfect Binder................................................. 297 imagePRESS C850 Series stacker / stapler settings................................ 294 Heavy media configure productivity................................... 278 Heavy media productivity configure correction.......................................278 High capacity stacker commercial name............................................ 25 default delivery settings................................ 295 location............................................................. 25 Hotfolder configure settings.......................................... 319 drag & drop files............................................ 118 I Image adjustment transaction printing mode...............................48 Image alignment copy jobs.........................................................385 print setting.................................................... 380 scan jobs......................................................... 389 Image quality copy jobs.........................................................387 media................................................................ 76 media registration..........................................218 relationship with media.................................216 scan jobs......................................................... 389 Image shift transaction printing................................362, 368 Image smoothing automated workflow......................................316 configure default............................................ 330 print setting.................................................... 382 Import resources........................................................ 370 transaction setup............................................356 Impositioning........................................................314 Information bar advanced color management......................... 45 automated workflow......................................316 configure.........................................................282 copy jobs.........................................................387 print setting.................................................... 382 Input and output profiles description...................................................... 410 Input profile print setting.................................................... 382 Input profiles configure.........................................................339 configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 transaction printing................................361, 368 Inserter commercial name............................................ 25 435 Index feed instruction for stapling.......................... 404 loading media into......................................... 105 parts.................................................................. 31 specifications..................................................418 supported envelopes..................................... 396 supported media size.....................................395 supported media type....................................393 Install resources........................................................ 370 Intermediate check prints configure.........................................................291 usage of.......................................................... 170 Internal paper tray feed instruction of envelopes........................406 Internal paper trays loading envelopes into.................................. 107 loading media into........................................... 91 loading tab paper into................................... 110 location....................................................... 24, 27 specifications..................................................416 supported envelopes..................................... 396 supported media size.....................................395 supported media type....................................393 IPDS configure via Settings Editor.........................355 IPDS port............................................................... 355 J Jagged outlines configure correction.......................................278 Job defaults configure.........................................................302 Job destination automated workflow......................................317 Job management bundling jobs..................................................151 changing job settings in queue.....................161 DocBox............................................................142 in the print queues......................................... 147 other printer....................................................154 page programming in queue........................ 162 remote.............................................................137 removing jobs................................................ 155 transaction printing mode.......................47, 147 viewing jobs in queue....................................150 workflow profiles............................................. 68 Job name copy jobs.................................................384, 387 scan jobs......................................................... 389 using shorter names........................................ 64 Job planning in job workflow.................................................46 media assignment..........................................158 436 Job preparation from USB drive...............................................119 in job workflow.................................................46 printer driver...................................................114 PRISMAprepare..............................................116 Remote manager............................................136 Remote Printer Driver.................................... 114 Job status indicators............................................ 390 Job ticket printing from the list of waiting jobs............169 Job timeout configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 Job workflow.......................................................... 46 Job-by-job workflow profile description........................................................ 69 K key operator color management...........................................44 description........................................................ 55 login.................................................................. 62 settings on control panel...............................222 Key operators..........................................................54 L Labels for selection function..................................... 147 printer driver...................................................114 Language control panel.....................................................64 LDAP........................................................................ 54 Leave out separations advanced color management......................... 45 Licenses overview......................................................... 411 transaction printing mode...............................47 Lines per page transaction printing........................................365 Long Sheet Tray-B1 specifications..................................................414 Long sheets description........................................................ 34 loading of........................................................103 Low power mode....................................................58 configure.........................................................267 energy level.................................................... 267 LPD configure ripping............................................307 Lubricate die set................................................... 263 M Maintenance imagePRESS C850 Series Index print module................................................... 264 tasks................................................................ 222 Maintenance operator description........................................................ 55 login.................................................................. 62 Maintenance operators.......................................... 54 Manual planning workflow profile description........................................................ 69 Margin erase copy jobs.........................................................385 print setting.................................................... 380 scan jobs......................................................... 389 Measurement chart automated workflow......................................316 Media adding to the media catalog........................... 84 assignment to jobs.........................................112 assignment to paper trays.............................158 attributes...........................................................76 automated workflow......................................313 checking and preparing before loading......... 86 copy jobs.........................................................385 edit, copy, delete.............................................. 82 fanning.............................................................. 86 indicators........................................................ 392 loading while printing....................................112 ordering.......................................................... 224 overview of supported media types...............76 preview function............................................ 160 print setting.................................................... 380 quality............................................................... 76 registration............................................. 216, 218 relationship with media.................................216 supported envelopes by paper input optional.. 396 supported sizes by paper input optional......395 supported types by paper input optional.....393 tray mapping.......................................... 360, 366 Media assignment transaction printing mode...............................47 Media catalog adding media to............................................... 84 adding temporary media to.......................... 157 automated workflows...................................... 49 configure.........................................................322 curled media correction.................................217 edit, copy, delete media.................................. 82 features and benefits....................................... 43 manage ............................................................ 82 media corrections.......................................... 218 printer driver...................................................114 PRISMAprepare..............................................116 search and filter media.................................... 82 Media color imagePRESS C850 Series configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 Media Families manage........................................................... 326 Media family calibration....................................................... 186 creation........................................................... 210 description.................................................. 44, 45 Media registration................................................ 218 Media size configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 notation...........................................................274 Media weight configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 notation...........................................................274 Mixed media productivity configure correction.......................................278 Moiré reduction automated workflow......................................316 configure default............................................ 330 print setting.................................................... 382 Monitor jobs via SNMP configure ........................................................307 Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1 parts.................................................................. 38 specifications..................................................419 Multi-touch pinch zoom gesture......................................... 67 N Named color profile import and export advanced color management......................... 45 NTP server.............................................................272 Number of copies transaction printing........................................365 Number of sets automated workflow......................................313 copy jobs.................................................384, 387 O Offline transaction printing........................................355 Offset stacking automated workflow......................................315 configure.........................................................275 configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 high capacity stacker settings....................... 295 transaction printing........................................365 Online transaction printing........................................355 Operator description........................................................ 55 login.................................................................. 62 437 Index media configuration.........................................43 Operator attention light location............................................................. 24 Operators................................................................ 54 Orientation automated workflow......................................314 Original size and type copy jobs.........................................................385 scan jobs......................................................... 388 Originals grouping in copy subsets.............................. 131 grouping in scan subsets.............................. 132 requirements for automatic document feeder.. 124 requirements for glass plate......................... 126 Output removing.........................................................180 Output location automated workflow......................................315 configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 copy jobs.........................................................386 print setting.................................................... 381 Output profiles configure.........................................................341 configure default............................................ 330 creation of.......................................................211 Output recovery transaction printing........................................359 Output tray commercial name............................................ 25 parts.................................................................. 40 Overprinting black configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 print setting.................................................... 382 Overrule job ticket................................................ 313 P Page numbering automated workflow......................................318 configure font................................................. 285 print setting.................................................... 382 Page Programming changing settings in queue................... 161, 162 copy jobs.........................................................131 functions......................................................... 384 license............................................................. 411 scan jobs......................................................... 132 Page size scan jobs......................................................... 388 Page timeout configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 Pages per record 438 automated workflow......................................317 Paper Folding Unit-J1 parts.................................................................. 39 Paper Input specifications..................................................414 Paper input module specifications..................................................417 Paper module commercial name............................................ 25 loading media into........................................... 93 parts.................................................................. 29 supported envelopes..................................... 396 supported media size.....................................395 supported media type....................................393 Paper tray assigning media to.........................................158 feed instruction of tab paper.........................408 indicators........................................................ 391 loading while printing....................................112 Paper tray button....................................................50 Paper trays media assignment via schedule................... 112 media assignment via Trays view................ 158 PCL configure via Settings Editor.........................355 PCL port.................................................................355 PCL-XL error page................................................ 365 PDF default job properties.................................... 302 PDF enable cache................................................. 361 PDF fonts transaction printing........................................370 PDF for IPDS license............................................................. 411 PDF overprint print setting.................................................... 382 PDF overprint simulation configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 transaction printing........................................361 PDF preflight via Remote Manager......................................137 PDF spot color 'All' transaction printing........................................361 PDF Xobject...........................................................302 automated workflow......................................317 PDF/X output intent configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 print setting.................................................... 382 Perfect binder commercial name............................................ 25 default delivery settings................................ 297 location............................................................. 25 imagePRESS C850 Series Index sleep mode..................................................... 267 Perfect binding options.............................................................. 79 PIN configure DocBox PIN....................................311 Pinch zoom gesture control panel.....................................................67 Placement originals Glass plate...................................................... 126 PostScript default job properties.................................... 302 Power switch print module..................................................... 27 PPML default job properties.................................... 302 Preflight via Remote Manager......................................137 Preserve pure black configure default............................................ 330 print setting.................................................... 382 Preview settings................................................... 160 Print variable data................................................... 174 Print black & white configure default............................................ 330 Print density configure.........................................................299 Print in black and white configure color preset....................................336 Print job proofing.......................................................... 168 settings............................................................380 settings on control panel...............................380 Print job production in job workflow.................................................46 media assignment..........................................112 Print jobs bundling..........................................................147 bundling waiting jobs.................................... 151 changing settings in queue........................... 161 combining in DocBox.................................... 144 convert to variable data job.......................... 156 editing in DocBox...........................................143 from USB........................................................ 119 loading media.................................................112 locking settings in DocBox............................ 145 page programming........................................ 384 page programming in queue........................ 162 preview........................................................... 160 printing from DocBox.................................... 146 printing from list of scheduled jobs............. 172 printing from the list of waiting jobs............171 removing.........................................................155 reprinting........................................................ 173 imagePRESS C850 Series routing via workflow profiles.......................... 68 stopping.......................................................... 175 transaction printing mode...............................47 viewing in queue............................................150 Print mode transaction printing........................................365 Print module cleaning...........................................................258 parts.................................................................. 27 Print module maintenance procedure........................................................264 Print quality adjustments.....................................278 Print resolution automated workflow......................................316 configure.........................................................299 configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 Print settings page programming........................................ 384 transaction printing mode...............................48 Print sharpness configure.........................................................299 print setting.................................................... 382 Print sides automated workflow......................................314 configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 Print system into low power mode.......................................58 into sleep mode................................................58 language........................................................... 64 restart................................................................ 60 specifications..................................................412 switching to transaction printing mode....... 176 transaction printing mode...............................48 turning off......................................................... 61 turning on......................................................... 59 Print ticket creation........................................................... 114 Printed jobs configure storage time.................................. 310 E-shredding.................................................... 148 enable..............................................................310 enable printing............................................... 148 printing....................................................148, 173 removal of.......................................................148 removing.........................................................155 Printer calibration configure.........................................................328 Printer cover commercial name............................................ 25 Printer driver download........................................................ 114 job preparation...............................................114 Printing DocBox jobs....................................................146 439 Index printed jobs.....................................................173 scheduled jobs............................................... 172 waiting jobs............................................ 147, 171 Printing workflow................................................. 317 Prints storage........................................................183 Priority configure quality or productivity.................. 299 Priority modes configure.........................................................275 PRISMAprepare description...................................................... 116 job preparation...............................................116 variable data printing.....................................120 PRISMAsync accounting........................................................ 71 color information........................................... 410 color management...........................................44 job management...................................... 68, 147 job workflow.....................................................46 media assignment............................................43 media catalog................................................... 43 Print Server.......................................................24 workflow profiles............................................. 68 PRISMAsync Remote Control description........................................................ 52 PRISMAsync Remote Manager access................................................................54 description........................................................ 51 job management............................................ 149 Problems and solutions optimizing scan quality..................................376 overview......................................................... 374 Productivity heavy media................................................... 278 Professional puncher commercial name............................................ 25 configure usage..............................................275 location............................................................. 25 parts.................................................................. 38 specifications..................................................419 Professional punching options..............................80 Punch hole distances specifications..........................................425, 429 Punch unit location (professional stacker / stapler)......... 35 location (standard stacker / stapler)............... 37 Punch waste removing (professional stacker / stapler).....248 removing (standard stacker / stapler)...........250 Punching automated workflow......................................315 copy jobs.........................................................387 options.............................................................. 79 print setting.................................................... 383 440 Q Queue name..........................................................313 R Raster configure default............................................ 299 Records..................................................................174 Regional settings.................................................. 272 Remote Control description................................................ 52, 139 usage of.......................................................... 139 Remote job planning execution........................................................ 137 set up...............................................................135 Remote Manager description........................................................ 51 job management ........................................... 149 job preparation...............................................136 license............................................................. 411 set up...............................................................135 start................................................................... 51 submit jobs..................................................... 136 Remote Printer Driver job preparation...............................................114 Render text as graphics configure PDF, PPML default........................ 302 print setting.................................................... 382 Render thick lines as graphics configure PDF default.................................... 302 Rendering intent description...................................................... 410 print setting.................................................... 382 transaction printing................................361, 368 Rendering intents configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 Resolution configure.........................................................299 scan jobs......................................................... 388 Resources captured.......................................................... 370 delete...............................................................370 imported......................................................... 370 installed...........................................................370 permanent...................................................... 370 set a default value.......................................... 370 transaction printing........................................370 Restart print system......................................................60 Restore transaction setup............................................356 RIP imagePRESS C850 Series Index job location..................................................... 307 RIP location configure.........................................................307 Rotation automated workflow......................................314 S Saddle-stitch unit location (professional stacker / stapler)......... 35 location (standard stacker / stapler)............... 37 Scan job settings............................................................388 Scan jobs combined scan job.........................................132 description...................................................... 123 destination...................................................... 123 optimizing scan quality..................................376 page programming........................................ 132 start a scan job............................................... 128 starting at automatic document feeder........124 starting at glass plate.....................................126 subsets............................................................ 132 templates........................................................ 123 Scanning sensors................................................. 256 Schedule description...................................................... 178 warning time.............................................. 56, 66 Scheduled jobs change print order of..................................... 148 media assignment via schedule................... 112 moving to the list of waiting jobs................. 153 order of printing............................................. 148 printing....................................................148, 172 Secure error recovery transaction printing................................359, 363 Security PIN DocBox............................................................142 printer driver...................................................114 Selection function list of printed jobs.......................................... 148 list of waiting jobs..........................................147 Separator sheets...................................................152 automated workflow......................................317 copy jobs.................................................384, 387 media.............................................................. 288 Service organization import export configuration file....................355 Settings Editor access................................................................54 color management...........................................44 create automated workflows...........................49 definition of color and information bars...... 382 DocBox configuration.................................... 142 imagePRESS C850 Series E-shredding.................................................... 148 enable list of printed jobs..............................148 language........................................................... 52 search settings................................................. 52 setting icons..................................................... 52 settings on control panel...............................222 specifications..................................................430 start Remote Manager..................................... 52 symbols.............................................................52 transaction printing setups............................. 48 Shading correction automatic procedure......................................189 description...................................................... 186 error.................................................................377 manual procedure..........................................198 Shading correction timer..................................... 328 Sharpness configure.........................................................299 Sheet order automated workflow......................................315 external finisher settings............................... 292 high capacity stacker settings....................... 295 Perfect Binder................................................. 297 stacker / stapler settings................................ 294 Sheet view.............................................................160 Shut down configure automatic shut down....................267 timer................................................................ 267 Simulation profile.................................................343 Sleep button location............................................................. 50 Sleep mode............................................................. 58 energy level.................................................... 267 timer................................................................ 267 Small text configure print quality................................... 299 Socket printing configure ripping............................................307 Software protection license............................................................. 411 Sorting automated workflow......................................313 configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 copy jobs.........................................................386 options.............................................................. 80 print setting.................................................... 381 Source color..........................................................353 Special feeder commercial name............................................ 25 feed instruction of envelopes........................407 loading long sheets........................................103 loading media into......................................... 101 location............................................................. 25 parts.................................................................. 33 441 Index specifications..........................................414, 415 supported envelopes..................................... 396 supported media size.....................................395 supported media type....................................393 Spot color configure.........................................................348 configure attributes........................................348 creation........................................................... 207 definition.........................................................207 measurement................................................. 208 patch chart...................................................... 208 Spot color libraries configuration.................................................. 345 Spot color matching configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 Spot color patch chart print from Settings Editor..............................348 Spot Colors color mapping.................................................. 45 configuration.................................................. 345 print setting.................................................... 382 Spot layers advanced color management......................... 45 Stacker maximum stack height.................................. 275 minimum filling level.....................................275 Stacker / stapler removing output............................................ 180 Stacker/stapler commercial name............................................ 25 configure high volume stacking................... 275 default delivery settings................................ 294 parts (professional stacker / stapler_..............35 parts (standard stacker-stapler)...................... 37 specifications..................................420, 425, 427 Stacker/stapler with saddle-stitch unit specifications..................................................422 Stacking copy jobs.........................................................386 options.............................................................. 80 print setting.................................................... 381 Standard rules for CMYK saturation intent print setting.................................................... 382 Standard rules saturation intent configure color preset....................................336 configure default............................................ 330 Standard workflow profile description........................................................ 68 Staple Cartridge checking filling level...................................... 235 ordering for saddle-stitch unit...................... 226 ordering for staple unit..................................226 Staple cartridge (professional stacker / stapler) 442 replacing the staple cartridge in the staple unit ......................................................................... 236 replacing the staple cartridges in the saddlestitch unit........................................................ 238 Staple cartridge (standard stacker / stapler) replacing the staple cartridge in the staple unit ......................................................................... 241 replacing the staple cartridges in the saddlestitch unit........................................................ 244 Staple waste removing.........................................................246 Stapling automated workflow......................................315 configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 copy jobs.........................................................387 options.............................................................. 78 print setting.................................................... 383 Status color control panel.....................................................56 operator attention light....................................56 Status LED...............................................................50 Step size................................................................ 348 Stop button............................................................. 50 Streaming job error configure.........................................................307 Suppressed mode transaction printing........................................359 System parts.................................................................. 24 system administrator color management...........................................44 description........................................................ 55 login.................................................................. 62 media configuration.........................................43 System administrators...........................................54 System configuration tasks................................................................ 222 System monitoring.................................................56 System of measurement......................................274 System view information....................................................... 51 T Target spot color.................................................. 353 Task splitting color management...........................................44 media configuration.........................................43 Templates copy jobs.........................................................121 printer driver...................................................114 recurring......................................................... 130 scan jobs......................................................... 123 Temporary media imagePRESS C850 Series Index adding to the media catalog......................... 157 benefits............................................................. 76 Thin lines configure scan correction..............................281 Thin white lines configure correction.......................................278 Tickets media.............................................................. 289 Time settings........................................................ 272 Time zone..............................................................272 Tolerance...............................................................353 Toner cartridge checking filling level...................................... 228 Toner cartridges ordering.......................................................... 224 replacing......................................................... 229 Toner compartment cover..................................................................24 Trailer page........................................................... 152 Trailer pages enable..............................................................286 media...................................................... 286, 289 Transaction printing bring online via Settings Editor.................... 355 code pages......................................................370 color mapping................................................ 370 configure general settings.............................355 configure transaction setups.........................356 default resources............................................370 fonts................................................................ 370 license............................................................. 411 resource management...................................370 secure error recovery.....................................363 tray mapping.......................................... 360, 366 Transaction printing mode activating........................................................ 176 color management.....................................47, 48 configuration.................................................... 48 convergence printing.......................................47 description........................................................ 47 image adjustment............................................ 48 job management............................................ 147 secure error recovery.......................................48 Transaction setup add...................................................356, 359, 365 color management.................................361, 368 copy.................................................................356 delete...............................................................356 edit...................................................................356 edit IPDS setup............................................... 359 edit PCL: setup................................................365 export.............................................................. 356 image shift.............................................. 362, 368 import..............................................................356 imagePRESS C850 Series load..................................................................358 media selection...................................... 360, 366 open................................................................ 358 restore............................................................. 356 Transparencies checking and preparing before loading......... 90 Trapping print setting.................................................... 382 Trapping preset automated workflow......................................316 creation of.......................................................196 Tray linking transaction printing................................362, 367 Tray mapping................................................360, 366 transaction printing mode...............................47 Tray selection transaction printing................................360, 366 Tray selection mechanism...................................365 transaction printing........................................359 Tray-to-media mapping............................... 360, 366 Tray-to-tray mapping................................... 360, 367 Trimming automated workflow......................................315 copy jobs.........................................................387 print setting.................................................... 383 Tumble automated workflow......................................314 configure PDF, PPML, PostScript default..... 302 Turn off the print system....................................... 61 Turn on print system......................................................59 Two-knife trimmer commercial name............................................ 25 location............................................................. 25 U Unattended workflow profile description........................................................ 70 Uneven gloss configure correction.......................................278 USB drive configure.........................................................307 printing from.................................................. 119 USB port..................................................................50 USB ports print module..................................................... 27 Use default tray-to-tray mechanism transaction printing........................................365 Use of mouse........................................................266 User authentication................................................ 54 443 Index V Variable data printing automated workflow......................................317 convert from normal job............................... 156 description...................................................... 120 job information...............................................174 records............................................................ 174 VarioPrint i-Series platform............................................................ 12 W Waiting jobs printing....................................................147, 171 printing job ticket........................................... 169 Warning time change...............................................................66 description........................................................ 66 use of.................................................................56 Waste toner container checking filling level...................................... 232 ordering.......................................................... 225 replacing......................................................... 233 White gap configure correction.......................................278 Workload planning execution........................................................ 134 set up...............................................................135 Z Z-fold transaction printing........................................359 Zoom copy jobs.........................................................385 function........................................................... 409 print setting.................................................... 380 scan jobs......................................................... 389 444 imagePRESS C850 Series CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan CANON U.S.A., INC. One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A. CANON CANADA INC. 8000 Mississauga Road Brampton, ON L6Y 5Z7, Canada CANON EUROPA N.V. Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD Building A, The Park Estate, 5 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park, NSW 2113, Australia CANON CHINA CO., LTD 2F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD 1 Fusionopolis Place, #15-10, Galaxis, Singapore 138522 USRM2-7908-01 © CANON INC. 2017
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res Author : CANON INC. Create Date : 2017:07:03 11:33:16+01:00 Keywords : English, English-US, Canon, imagePRESS C850 Series, imagePRESS C850, imagePRESS C750, imagePRESS C650 Modify Date : 2017:07:03 13:30:15+02:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Format : application/pdf Title : imagePRESS C850 Series_Operation guide Title (x-repair) : imagePRESS C850 Series_Operation guide Description : Operation guide_5.2_2017-07 Creator : CANON INC. Subject : English, English-US, Canon, imagePRESS C850 Series, imagePRESS C850, imagePRESS C750, imagePRESS C650 Producer : Antenna House PDF Output Library 6.1.469 (Windows (x64)); modified using iTextSharp 4.1.6 by 1T3XT Trapped : False Creator Tool : AH XSL Formatter V6.1 MR5 for Windows (x64) : 6.1.10.15243 (2014/02/05 16:43JST) Metadata Date : 2017:07:03 13:30:15+02:00 Document ID : uuid:2f07b348-7f77-4180-8523-011150dc3530 Instance ID : uuid:a10b6f66-4a3c-421b-8f43-8e37197997b3 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 446EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools